Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-12 User & Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lucent Technologies Manuals
  4. Multiplexer
  5. DDM-2000 OC-12
  6. User & service manual
Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-12 User & Service Manual

Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-12 User & Service Manual

Release 7.0
Hide thumbs Also See for DDM-2000 OC-12:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer
Release 7.0
User/Service Manual — Volume I
363-206-295
Issue 1
December 1997

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the DDM-2000 OC-12 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-12

Summary of Contents for Lucent Technologies DDM-2000 OC-12

  • Page 1 DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Release 7.0 User/Service Manual — Volume I 363-206-295 Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 2 In such event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
  • Page 3 Documentation Support Telephone Number Lucent Technologies provides a telephone number for you to report errors or to ask questions about the information in this document. The support telephone number is 1-888-584-6366. Developed by Lucent Technologies Network Systems Customer Training and Information Products.
  • Page 4 Issue No.: Date: December 1997 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs. 1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:...
  • Page 5 ---------------------------------------------------------------- Do Not Cut — Fold Here And Tape ------------------------------------------------------------------------- NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE DOCUMENTATION SERVICES 2400 Reynolda Road Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029...
  • Page 6 Issue No.: Date: December 1997 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs. 1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:...
  • Page 7 ---------------------------------------------------------------- Do Not Cut — Fold Here And Tape ------------------------------------------------------------------------- NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE DOCUMENTATION SERVICES 2400 Reynolda Road Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029...
  • Page 8 How to Order Documents lxviii Standing Orders lxix How to Comment on This Document Electronic Documentation System Introduction Overview Introduction to the 2000 Product Family Introduction to the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Releases Release Descriptions Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 9 Contents DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Release 7.0 Release Description Applications Overview Introduction Network Configurations Path Switched Rings OC-12 Path Switched Rings OC-12 STS-1/VT1.5 Path Switched Ring (0x1) 2-12 Folded Ring 2-13 OC-3 Ring Transport on OC-12 Point-to-Point 2-14 Dual Homing 2-15...
  • Page 10 Contents Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Overview DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Shelf DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Shelf Configurations OC-12 STS-1 Path Switched Ring Shelf OC-12 STS-1/VT1.5 Path Switched Ring Configuration 3-10 OC-3/IS-3 Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) Configuration 3-11 OC-12 Ring Configuration (DS1/EC-1 Low-Speed...
  • Page 11 Contents Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Overview Transmission Interfaces OC-12 STS-1 Path Switched Ring Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) OC-3/OC-12 Ring (0x1) Low-Speed Interfaces Linear (1+1) Optical Extension Between OC-12 and OC-3 Synchronization Interfaces 5-10 Free-Running 5-10 Line Timing 5-10 DS1 External 5-10 Holdover 5-11...
  • Page 12 Contents Operations Interfaces Overview Craft Interface Terminals (CIT) Local Access Using a PC as a CIT Modem Access Remote Access Using the Data Communications Channel (DCC) CPro-2000 Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool User Panel User Panel LEDs 6-10 FE SEL Pushbutton 6-10 ACO/TST Pushbutton 6-10...
  • Page 13 Detailed Description of Operation Control Circuitry Memory Transmission/Timing Circuit Pack Interfaces Operation Interfaces OC-12 Transport Overhead Channel Power Monitoring and Fan Control Interface to Other DDM-2000 OC-12 Shelves Power Circuitry BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Hardware Setting 7-10 BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Quick Reference Summary...
  • Page 14 Contents Interface Circuitry 7-15 Maintenance Features and Modes 7-15 Power Circuitry 7-15 OHCTL Quick Reference Summary 7-15 Functions 7-15 Synchronization 7-16 Synchronization Functions 7-16 BBF2B/BBF4 TGS/TG3 Circuit Pack Description 7-16 Purpose of Circuit 7-16 TG Faceplate Indicators 7-17 General Description of Operation 7-18 DS1 Timing Output 7-18...
  • Page 15 Contents Timing Circuitry 7-28 Protection Circuitry 7-28 Fault Detection Circuitry 7-29 Power Circuitry 7-29 BBG11 3DS3 Hardware Settings 7-30 BBG11 3DS3 Quick Reference Summary 7-31 Transmit Functions 7-31 Receive Functions 7-31 Control Functions 7-31 Maintenance Signal Functions 7-31 BBG11B 3DS3 Circuit Pack Description 7-32 Purpose of Circuit 7-32...
  • Page 16 Contents Detailed Description of Operation 7-41 Transmission Circuitry 7-41 Control Circuitry 7-41 Timing Circuitry 7-42 Protection Circuitry 7-42 Fault Detection Circuitry 7-43 Power Circuitry 7-43 BBG12 3STS1E Hardware Settings 7-44 BBG12 3STS1E Quick Reference Summary 7-45 Transmit Functions 7-45 Receive Functions 7-45 Control Functions 7-45...
  • Page 17 Contents Protection Circuitry 7-54 Fault Detection Circuitry 7-54 Performance Monitoring 7-54 Power Circuitry 7-54 21D/21D-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary 7-55 Transmit Functions 7-55 Receive Functions 7-55 Control Functions 7-55 Maintenance Signal Functions 7-55 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description 7-56 Purpose of Circuit 7-56 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7-56...
  • Page 18 Contents Transmission Circuitry 7-66 Control Circuitry 7-67 Timing Circuitry 7-68 Protection Circuitry 7-68 Fault Detection Circuitry 7-68 Performance Monitoring 7-68 Power Circuitry 7-68 23G/23G-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary 7-69 Transmit Functions 7-69 Receive Functions 7-69 Control Functions 7-69 Maintenance Signal Functions 7-69 23H/23H-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description 7-70...
  • Page 19 Contents Administration and Provisioning Overview Administration Version Recognition Security Software Upgrades Remote Software Download and Copy Software Compatibility Controller Maintenance Memory Administration System Backup and Restoral ITM SNC Service-Affecting Actions Multiplexing and Mapping DS3 to OC-12 OC-3 to OC-12 OC-3c to OC-12 (Optional Feature) EC-1 to OC-12 Provisioning Default Provisioning...
  • Page 20 Contents Line State Provisioning 8-14 Remote OS Access (TL1/X.25 GNE) 8-14 Remote CIT Login 8-14 Remote Software Download and Copy 8-14 Subnetwork Size 8-14 Cross-Connection Provisioning 8-15 Cross-Connection Types 8-15 Ring (0x1) Cross-Connections 8-15 Video Cross-Connections 8-15 Drop and Continue Cross-Connections 8-15 Pass-Through Cross-Connections 8-16...
  • Page 21 Contents Maintenance Description Overview Three-Tiered Operations Single-Ended Maintenance Philosophy Multi-Vendor OI In-service (IS) Upgrades Software Upgrades DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Software Compatibility Maintenance Signaling 9-10 Fault Detection, Isolation, and Reporting 9-16 Detection 9-16 Isolation 9-16 Reporting 9-16 Protection Switching 9-17 Automatic Line Protection 9-17 Status of ACTIVE LED on OLIUs...
  • Page 22 Contents Adjusted F&M Bit 9-29 C-Bit 9-30 DS3 Line Performance Monitoring 9-30 DS3 Performance Monitoring Parameters 9-30 Optical Parameters 9-33 Performance Monitoring (PM) Enabling 9-33 Laser Bias Current 9-33 Optical Transmit Power 9-33 OC-3 and OC-12 Section Parameters 9-33 Performance Monitoring (PM) Enabling 9-33 Severely Errored Frame Seconds (SEFS) 9-33...
  • Page 23 Alarms and Status Report 9-42 Provisioning Reports 9-42 Maintenance History Report 9-42 State Reports 9-43 Equipment Report 9-43 Neighbor Map Report 9-43 Network Map Report 9-43 Technical Specifications Overview 10-1 DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer 10-1 External Transmission Interfaces 10-1 xxiv Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 24 Contents Electrical Interfaces 10-2 DS3 Low-Speed (BBG11/11B 3DS3) 10-2 EC-1 Low-Speed (BBG12 3STS1E) 10-5 Optical Interfaces 10-6 Lightguide Jumpers 10-6 Long Reach OC-3 Interface (21G/21G-U/ 21G2-U OLIU) 10-7 IS-3 Interface (21D/21D-U OLIU) 10-8 Long Reach 1310 nm OC-12 Interface (23G/ 23G-U OLIU) 10-13 Long Reach 1550 nm OC-12 Interface (23H/...
  • Page 25 10-35 Shelf Fuses 10-35 Power Dissipation 10-36 DDM-2000 OC-12 Reliability 10-38 Summary 10-38 Transmission Availability 10-38 Operation System Interface Availability 10-39 Optical Module Maintenance Objective 10-39 Infant Mortality 10-39 DDM-2000 OC-12 System Reliability Predictions 10-40 xxvi Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 26 Contents Commands and Reports Overview 11-1 Command Page Format 11-1 Addresses 11-3 Special Control Characters 11-7 DDM-2000 OC-12 Command Menu 11-10 CPro-2000 11-16 Commands 11-17 RTRV-ALM Reports 11-356 RTRV-HSTY Reports 11-373 A SONET Overview Overview History Basic Purpose Technical Overview...
  • Page 27 Contents Virtual Tributary Signals A-15 Concatenated Mode A-16 SONET Interface A-17 SONET Payloads A-18 Higher Rate Transport A-19 Conclusion A-19 Glossary GL-1 Index IN-1 Software Release Description Volume II — Operation and Maintenance TOP xxviii Issue 1 December 1997...

  • Page 28: Table Of Contents

    OC-12 Path Switched Ring Using OC-12 Multiplexer—Mixed STS-1 and VT1.5 Path Switching OC-3 Ring with OC-12 Ring Transport Multinode OC-3 Ring With OC-12 Ring Transport 2-10 DDM-2000 OC-12 Path Switched Interoffice Ring 2-11 Folded Ring Configuration 2-13 OC-3 Ring Transport on OC-12 Point-to-Point 2-14...
  • Page 29 2-24 Intelligent Vehicle Highway System (IVHS) Application 2-39 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 OC-12 Shelf — Front View DDM-2000 OC-12 Shelf — Rear View DDM-2000 OC-12 Front Panel OC-12 STS-1 Path Switched Ring Shelf OC-12 STS-1/VT1.5 Path Switched Ring Configuration...
  • Page 30 Figures Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces OC-12 Multiplexer Block Diagram — STS-1/ VT1.5 Path Switched Ring Node OC-3/OC-12 Ring (0x1) Low-Speed Interfaces Single Homing OC-3/OC-12 Ring Low-Speed Interfaces (0x1) Dual Homing OC-12 Ring Shelf with Linear (1+1) OC-3 Low- Speed Interfaces (Transmit) OC-12 Ring Shelf with Linear (1+1) OC-3 Low- Speed Interfaces (Receive) Synchronization Timing Configurations...
  • Page 31 Figures BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Circuit Pack Block Diagram BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Option Switches 7-10 BCP4 OHCTL Circuit Pack 7-12 BCP4 OHCTL Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7-14 BBF2B TGS and BBF4 TG3 Circuit Pack 7-17 BBF2B TGS and BBF4 TG3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram 7-19 TG Option Switches for DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 32 Figures Administration and Provisioning OC-12 Ring Configuration Cross-Connections DS3 to DS3 With STS-1 Cross-Connections 8-23 Drop and Continue Nodes 8-27 Example Dual Ring Configuration Cross- Connections 8-29 Example Single Homed OC-3/OC-12 Ring (0x1) Configuration Cross-Connections 8-33 Example Dual Homed OC-3/OC-12 Ring (0x1) Cross-Connections 8-35 Example Dual Homed OC-3/OC-12 Ring (0x1)
  • Page 33 Figures Commands and Reports 11-1 EC1 Loopbacks 11-92 11-2 DS3 Loopbacks 11-94 11-3 Automated Transmission Test of DS3 Signal in MUX Direction 11-344 11-4 Automated Transmission Test of DS3 Signal in DEMUX Direction 11-345 A SONET Overview SONET STS-1 Frame — Simplified Version Section, Line, and Path Definitions SONET Frame Format VT Path Overhead Byte...
  • Page 34 Tables Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 OC-12 Plug-Ins DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Circuit Pack and Software Compatibility Matrix DDM-2000 Fan Shelf Switch Settings 3-20 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Application Summary Matrix DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Synchronization 5-14 Synchronization Messages using K2 Byte...
  • Page 35 Tables DDM-2000 OC-12 Manual STS-3c Cross- Connections (Rings Pass-Through) 8-18 DDM-2000 OC-12 Manual STS-1 Cross- Connections (Rings Drop and Continue) 8-19 DDM-2000 OC-12 Manual STS-3c Cross- Connections (Rings Drop and Continue) 8-19 DDM-2000 OC-12 Manual STS-3c Cross- Connections (RTV) 8-19...
  • Page 36 10-18 TL1/X.25 Interface — LAPB Link Layer Parameters 10-32 10-20 Power Dissipation and Current Drains 10-36 10-21 DDM-2000 OC-12 System Reliability Prediction 10-40 10-22 DDM-2000 OC-12 Circuit Pack Reliability 10-41 10-23 DDM-2000 Fan Shelf Steady State Failure Rates (Based on Bellcore RPP Issue 4 Data)
  • Page 37 Tables A SONET Overview SONET Payloads A-18 SONET Transport Rates A-19 xxxviii Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 38 About This Document Table of Contents Purpose Intended Audiences Reason for Reissue Multi-Vendor OI xlii Safety Instructions xliii xliii Product Safety Labels xliii Lightwave Safety Guidelines xliii General Laser Information xliv Lasers and Eye Damage xliv Classification of Lasers Lightwave Safety Precautions xlvi Safety Precautions for Enclosed Systems xlvii...
  • Page 39 DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer O&M. Reason for Reissue This is Issue 1 of this document. It is based upon the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer User/Service Manual, Volume I , Issue 2 (363-206-290). It has been updated with information exclusively on Release 7.0. Significant changes to this document are noted by change bars (|) in the outermost margins.
  • Page 40 SONET NEs that support TL1 OS interfaces. DDM-2000 OC-12 R7.0 is developed to be compatible with any other-vendor NEs that also support TARP, OSI, IAO LAN, and TL1/X.25 as specified in Bellcore GR-253. In addition, DDM-2000’s TARP Manual Adjacency feature enables DDM-2000 to operate in networks that include CMISE-based NEs which may not support TARP propagation.
  • Page 41 The alert symbol • appears throughout this product and in this manual to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions for the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. Lightwave Safety Guidelines General Laser Information...
  • Page 42 363-206-295 About This Document Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light. The term monochromaticity means a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visible or invisible to the eye. A conventional laser produces a small-size beam of light, and because the beam size is small the power density (also called irradiance) is very high.
  • Page 43 363-206-295 About This Document Lightwave Safety Precautions In its normal operating mode, a lightwave system is totally enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I system under the FDA/CDRH scheme. The lightguide cables that interconnect various components of a lightwave system can disconnect or break and may expose people to lightwave emission.
  • Page 44 363-206-295 About This Document Safety Precautions for Enclosed Systems Under normal operating conditions, lightwave transmission systems are completely enclosed; nonetheless, the following precautions should be observed: Because of the potential for eye damage, technicians should neither disconnect any lightwave cable nor splice and stare into the optical connectors terminating the cables.
  • Page 45 363-206-295 About This Document Safety Precautions for Unenclosed Systems During service, maintenance, or restoration, a lightwave transmission system is considered unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow these practices: Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenance, and restoration. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energized optical connectors at close distances.
  • Page 46 ESD: Assume all circuit packs contain solid state electronic components that can be damaged by ESD. Use only Lucent Technologies’ manufactured recognized circuit packs in this system. Recognized circuit packs are listed in this user/service manual.
  • Page 47 363-206-295 About This Document To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, shelves are equipped with grounding jacks to enable personnel to ground themselves using wrist straps (see Figure A) while handling circuit packs or working on a shelf(s). The jacks for connection of wrist straps are located at the lower right-hand corner of each shelf and are labeled.
  • Page 48 Caution: Disconnect two (2) power connections when removing power from the system. Use only Lucent Technologies’ manufactured UL recognized circuit packs in this system. Recognized circuit packs are listed in this user/service manual. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
  • Page 49 For information on proper mounting instructions, consult 363-206-208, DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Installation Manual . Never install telecommunication wiring during a lightning storm. Never install telecommunication connections in wet locations. Never touch uninsulated telecommunication wires or terminals unless the telecommunication line has been disconnected at the DS3 interface.
  • Page 50 Title: DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Installation Manual Audience: Customers planning to install the equipment Content: Customer installation instructions Number: 363-206-206 Title: DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer — System Commands Quick Reference Audience: Maintenance personnel Content: Abbreviated list of system commands and parameters for DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers through Release 3.1...
  • Page 51 363-206-295 About This Document Number: 363-206-207 Title: DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer and OC-12 Regenerator User/Service Manual Audience: Maintenance personnel Content: Detailed description, technical specifications, commands and reports, and operations and maintenance procedures for DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers through Release 3.1 and OC-12 Regenerator through Release 2.0.
  • Page 52 363-206-295 About This Document Number: 363-206-291 Title: DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer — System Commands Quick Reference Audience: Maintenance personnel Content: Abbreviated list of system commands and parameters for DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers, Release 5.x Number: 363-206-300 Title: DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer Applications, Planning, and...
  • Page 53 363-206-295 About This Document Number: 824-102-151 Title: DDM-2000 Multiplexers Operations Systems Engineering Guide Audience: Engineers Content: Operations systems engineering information for the DDM-2000 Multiplexers Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 54 ED-8C724-10 OC-3 and OC-3/OC-12 Combined Bay Arrangements ED-8C727-10 Typical Bay Arrangements ED-8C727-15 Cabling Plan (Rear Access) ED-8C727-16 Cabling Plan (Front Access) ED-8C727-20 Cable Assemblies ED-8C727-21 Cable Assemblies ED-8C727-30 Shelf Assembly ED-8C727-31 User Panel Assembly ED-8C727-34 DDM-2000 OC-12 Release 2 Software Ordering Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 55 About This Document ED-8C724-10 OC-3 and OC-3/OC-12 Combined Bay Arrangements ED-8C727-35 DDM-2000 OC-12 Release 3 Software Ordering ED-8C727-36 DDM-2000 OC-12 Release 5 Software Ordering ED-8C727-41 DDM-2000 OC-12 Regenerator Release 2 Software Ordering SD-7C513-01 Application Schematic T7C513-31 Interconnect Wiring Diagram (Rear Access)
  • Page 56 363-206-295 About This Document Number: 365-303-102 Title: DSX-3 Cross-Connect Bay, Description, Operation, and Maintenance Manual Number: 365-301-130 Title: System III DSX-3/4, Planning, Engineering, Installation, and Operation — System Reference Guide Number: 365-331-000 Title: DACS III-2000 Release 2.0 Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide Number: 365-340-004 Title: DACS IV-2000 Release 2.1 Reference Manual...
  • Page 57 Suitcasing of these courses is available. Consult your local Lucent Technologies’ Account Executive for more information or reservations. Call 1-888-LUCENT8 (1-888-582-3688), prompt 2 for enrollment.
  • Page 58 363-206-295 About This Document Number: LW2604 Title: DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer Ring/Linear Networks, Operations and Maintenance Audience: Technicians, supervisors, maintenance engineers, and operation support personnel involved in day-to-day provisioning and maintenance Content: Information supporting operations, maintenance, and provisioning or ring and/or linear DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers. On-site shelves are used for extensive hands-on experience.
  • Page 59 Content: Information supporting operations, maintenance, and provisioning of the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. Includes information on DDM-2000 OC-12 linear and ring applications. On-site shelves are used for extensive hands-on experience. Number: LW2614...
  • Page 60 363-206-295 About This Document Customer Technical Support (CTS) Customer Technical Support is available through a toll-free technical assistance number. Lucent maintains a highly-skilled, multi-tier support structure consisting of regional engineers, product specialists, and system designers to support your network equipment. All levels of technical expertise may be called upon to solve the customer problem.
  • Page 61 COACH tools provide you with the most up-to-date product information so that problems are either prevented or quickly resolved. Many Lucent Technologies transmission products, including DDM-2000 Multiplexers, are supported by COACH. Once logged into COACH, the user specifies which product to access, and COACH grants the appropriate combination of tools and commands.
  • Page 62 363-206-295 About This Document CUSTOMER Craft Customer Escalation Procedures COACH Self-Help Tools LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES RTAC First Lucent Contact Supports Customer Supports Lucent Installer COACH Self-Help Tools LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES NETWORK SYSTEMS TRANSMISSION CTS RTAC Assistance Problem Diagnosis/Isolation Provide Solutions/Work Arounds Consultation...
  • Page 63 Guide includes instructions on using the customer support tools and documents any changes to the previous version of the guide. For information on obtaining a COACH login, contact: COACH Software Development Lucent Technologies 1600 Osgood St. North Andover, MA. 01845 Telephone: 1-800-238-4021 The RTAC and CTS organization strive to provide proactive and responsive technical customer support for all its products.
  • Page 64 363-206-295 About This Document Engineering and Installation Services The Lucent Technologies Customer Support and Operations (CS&O) organization provides customers with quality product support services. Whether you need assistance in engineering, installation, normal system maintenance, or disaster recovery, the support staff provides you with the quality technical support you need to get your job done.
  • Page 65 363-206-295 About This Document Customer Technical Support Enhanced Services The goal of Lucent Technologies’ Customer Technical Support Enhanced Services is to keep Lucent Transmission Systems’ products operating at maximum performance and to prevent problems from interrupting service to customers. Typical Enhanced Services include:...
  • Page 66 To order additional copies of this document and/or request placement on the standing order list, send or call in an order as follows: Telephone Order Customer Mail Order (Monday through Friday) Commercial Lucent Technologies Within USA: Customers * Customer Information Center 1-888-LUCENT8 Attention: Order Entry Section 1-888-582-3688 2855 N.
  • Page 67 363-206-295 About This Document Standing Orders One-time orders include a binder (if applicable) and the document contents for the current issue in effect at the time of order. Also, you may request placement on the standing order list for all later reissues of the document. The standing order list for each document provides automatic distribution for all reissues of the document.
  • Page 68 1-888-LTINFO6 (1-888-584-6366), and giving the 9-digit document number. Electronic Documentation Documentation for the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer is now available in electronic form, on compact disk, read-only memory (CD-ROM). CD-ROM has many advantages over traditional paper documentation, including cost savings, search and retrieve capability, and the assurance of the most current documentation.
  • Page 69 System Introduction Table of Contents Overview Introduction to the 2000 Product Family Introduction to the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Releases Release Descriptions DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Release 7.0 Release Description Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 70 DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. Introduction to the 2000 Product Family Lucent Technologies is focused on a carefully planned and growing product family designed to provide total network solutions. The family complies with the synchronous optical network (SONET) standard and builds on items that customers have found to be useful and successful in networks such as single- ended maintenance and upgrade capabilities.

  • Page 71: Multiplexer And Oc-12 Regenerator

    Introduction to the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer is a single shelf SONET digital multiplexer. A single 12-inch shelf supports a mix of digital signal 3 (DS3), electrical carrier 1 (EC-1), and optical carrier level 3 (OC-3) signals and multiplexes them into a SONET standard 622 Mb/s optical carrier level 12 (OC-12) rate.
  • Page 72 System Introduction DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Releases Release Descriptions The following paragraphs provide brief descriptions of the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer releases: Release 1.0 and later features include OC-12 point-to-point with DS3 low-speed interfaces, OC-12 hubbing with OC-3 extensions, and OC-3/OC-12 interworking using the 21D optical line interface unit (OLIU).
  • Page 73 363-206-295 System Introduction Channel state provisioning is a capability provided on DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers that suppresses reporting of alarms and events by supporting multiple states (automatic [AUTO], in-service [IS], and not monitored [NMON]) for STS-1 channels. Release 2.3 provides OC-3 line state provisioning in addition to the features of Release 2.2.
  • Page 74 363-206-295 System Introduction Channel state provisioning is a capability provided on DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers that suppresses reporting of alarms and events by supporting multiple states (AUTO, IS, and NMON) for STS-1 channels. Electronic STS-1 loopbacks (EC-1 low-speed) are provided to loop each of the three internal STS-1 signals back toward the transmit fiber.
  • Page 75 BBG11B 3DS3 circuit pack. — Path switching and channel state provisioning for STS-3c channels. — Line state provisioning. A capability provided on DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers that suppresses reporting of alarms and events by supporting multiple states (IS and NMON) for OC-3 low-speed interfaces.
  • Page 76 363-206-295 System Introduction — Provisionable AIS or unequipped conditions. Allows the user to provision, on a per-shelf basis, for either AIS or unequipped signal insertion on a non-cross-connected STS channel. — Provisionable line and path AIS alarm levels. Alarm levels can be provisioned on a per-line or per-path basis.
  • Page 77 Release 7.0 Release Description NOTE: DDM-2000 OC-12 Release 7.0 is NOT compatible with previous releases of DDM-2000 OC-12. Therefore, when upgrading a subnetwork, care should be taken to avoid isolating NEs that have not yet been upgraded to Release 7.0.
  • Page 78 363-206-295 System Introduction — Pointer Justification Count (PJC). This performance monitoring parameter indicates a frequency error in the network or other potential synchronization problem. It provides a threshold crossing alert (TCA) when the STS-1 pointer justification count in a performance bin exceeds a user provisioned threshold value. —...
  • Page 79 Applications Table of Contents Overview Introduction Network Configurations Path Switched Rings OC-12 Path Switched Rings OC-12 STS-1/VT1.5 Path Switched Ring (0x1) 2-12 Folded Ring 2-13 OC-3 Ring Transport on OC-12 Point-to-Point 2-14 Dual Homing 2-15 Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) 2-15 OC-3 Linear Optical Extensions from OC-3 and OC-12 Rings 2-22 OC-12 Point-to-Point (Folded Ring)
  • Page 80 Applications Overview The DDM-2000 Multiplexers serve a wide range of service applications in a wide variety of network configurations economically and efficiently. The first part of this section, "Network Configurations," describes some of the network configurations in which the DDM-2000 Multiplexers and related products can be used to provide specific service applications.
  • Page 81 DDM-2000 network can be installed with minimum first cost and then easily grown to add new sites and new services. Many DDM-2000 circuit packs are common with other Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family products, resulting in further savings as the network evolves.
  • Page 82 DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 virtual tributary 1.5 (VT1.5) and STS-1 path switched rings, and SLC -2000 Access System path switched rings. DDM-2000 OC-3, SLC -2000 Access System, and DDM-2000 OC-12 self-healing rings offer the performance and administrative benefits demonstrated by the successful Lucent FT Series G Ring Diversity Switch.
  • Page 83 363-206-295 Applications The DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 VT1.5 or STS-1 path switched rings operate as shown in Figure 2-1(a.). Traffic entering a path switched ring node is sent onto both rotations of the ring. At the receiving node, the signal having the highest integrity (based on SONET path information) is selected and dropped as outgoing traffic.
  • Page 84 363-206-295 Applications AC CA AC CA Node A Node A Node D Node B Node D Node B Node C Node C SWITCH MADE AC CA AC CA (a.) Normal Operation (b.) Path Failure Figure 2-1. Path Switched Ring Issue 1 December 1997...

  • Page 85: Oc-12 Path Switched Ring - Sts-1 Level Path Switching

    Applications OC-12 Path Switched Rings The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer provides STS-1/STS-3c level path protection switched ring capability. As shown in Figure 2-2, it provides transport of 12 DS3s, 12 EC-1s, 4 OC-3cs, or a mixture with path switching at the STS-1 level (STS-3c level for OC-3c traffic).

  • Page 86: Path Switched Ring Using

    363-206-295 Applications Figure 2-3 shows how DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers can be used together to provide a path switched ring operating simultaneously at the VT1.5, STS-1, and STS-3c levels. This ring is especially useful for loop feeder applications with large bandwidth needs. It can also be developed as a result of an upgrade from an OC-3 ring in an environment where growth has exhausted the bandwidth of the OC-3 ring.

  • Page 87: Oc-3 Ring With Oc-12 Ring Transport

    fiber is unavailable or if the administrative ease of a single ring is desired, a single DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer ring can be installed. Fiber exhaustion often occurs when customer demand for voice, DS1, and DS3 services grows to fill the OC-3 ring's capacity.
  • Page 88 OC-12 bandwidth at any node on the ring, resulting in a full-fledged VT1.5 path switched OC-12 ring. The DDM-2000 OC-12 path switched ring can be used in conjunction with the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer by an access provider to provide OC-3 ring service on an OC-12 ring for end users.

  • Page 89: Applications

    363-206-295 Applications For customers who have significant bandwidth demands or whose geographical situation requires additional OC-3 shelves from a single OC-12 location, Figure 2-5 shows how these applications can also be met. In addition, diverse routing to two separate OC-12 shelves can increase the reliability of the network even further.

  • Page 90: Oc-12 Path Switched Interoffice Ring

    Switch Central Office DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 OC-12 IS-3 IS-3 DS3, EC-1, OC-3, OC-3c DDM-2000 OC-3 VT or STS-1 TSI DS1, DS3, EC-1 TO: DACS IV-2000 5ESS Switch Figure 2-6. DDM-2000 OC-12 Path Switched Interoffice Ring 2-11 Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 91 Function Unit slot FN(x)-1 is connected to OC-3 Main-1 and OC-12 Function Unit slot FN(x)-2 is connected to OC-3 Main-2. Switching is not done on the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer on these lines, or paths on these lines; rather VT1.5 or STS-1 level path switching is done on the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer. This allows DDM-2000 OC-3 nodes running ring software to interface with DDM-2000 nodes of an OC-12 ring in such a way as to provide ring-on-ring architecture.
  • Page 92 363-206-295 Applications Folded Ring DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 rings offer several benefits in addition to service assurance. Economically, a ring network minimizes overall network cost by requiring fewer optical transmit/receive units than a comparable linear add/drop network. Operationally, a ring network provides significant flexibility to increase bandwidth at existing nodes and to add new nodes at locations where unanticipated bandwidth is required.

  • Page 93: Oc-3 Ring Transport On Oc-12 Point-To-Point

    Figure 2-8 shows a ring configuration using DDM-2000 OC-3 ring nodes with DDM-2000 OC-12 point-to-point nodes to provide a high-service availability architecture. This configuration will survive fiber, equipment, and catastrophic office failure, since it provides an alternative service path through a...

  • Page 94: Dual Homing

    363-206-295 Applications Dual Homing End-users are demanding service with higher and higher availability. Service providers are responding with tariffs that rely on self-healing networks to offer such high availability service. Some of these tariffs even call for penalties for the service provider when service is interrupted or has a high error rate.
  • Page 95 363-206-295 Applications Interoffice Network Primary CO Secondary CO Insurance Company Office File BRT-2000 Server SLC®-2000 Access System RT/DDM-Plus Access Network Bridge BRT-2000 DDM-2000/ SLC®-2000 Access System Voice/Data DDM-Plus Figure 2-9. Dual Access Configuration 2-16 Issue 1 December 1997...

  • Page 96: Dual Ring Interworking Concepts

    363-206-295 Applications As Figure 2-10 shows, DRI allows a circuit (for instance, between nodes A and Z) with one termination in the upper ring and the other termination in the lower ring to survive a failure of the shared node that is currently carrying service for the circuit. The failure is depicted by an "X"...
  • Page 97 363-206-295 Applications DDM-2000 OC-3, OC-12, and FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave Systems can be configured to offer this topology. Often the DDM-2000 equipment is used for the loop feeder access ring, and the FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System equipment is used for the interoffice ring. Figure 2-11 shows a DDM-2000 OC-3 (or OC-12) path switched ring interworking with an FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System bidirectional line-switched ring.

  • Page 98: Oc-3/12 To Ft-2000 Oc-48 Lightwave System Dual Ring Interworking

    363-206-295 Applications DS3/EC-1 OC-48 OC-48 FT-2000 OC-48 CO #2 CO #1 2-Fiber Bidirectional Line Switched Ring FT-2000 FT-2000 OC-48 OC-48 OC-48 EC-1/ EC-1/ OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3/12 DDM-2000 OC-3/12 OC-3/12 VT1.5/STS-1 drop & continue DDM-2000 OC-3/12 OC-3/12 OC-3/12 DS1/DS3/EC-1/OC-3 Figure 2-11. OC-3/12 to FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System Dual Ring Interworking 2-19 Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 99 Signal redundancy is preserved on an end-to-end basis. In offices where SONET interconnections are not available, DS3 interfaces can be used between dual OC-12 offices. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer also supports DS3 DRI in addition to the EC-1 and OC-3 interfaces. In the event of an...
  • Page 100 363-206-295 Applications OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 Access Ring DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 DACS IV-2000 DACS IV-2000 OC-48 FT-2000 FT-2000 OC-48 FT-2000 FT-2000 EC-1 EC-1 VT1.5 (DS1) packing/ DACS DACS grooming IV-2000 IV-2000 From EC-1 EC-1 Async OC-3/12 systems DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3/12 OC-3/12 Drop &...
  • Page 101 363-206-295 Applications OC-3 Linear Optical Extensions from OC-3 and OC-12 Rings An additional topological flexibility offered by the DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers is 1+1 protected linear OC-3 and IS-3 optical extensions from OC-3 and OC-12 rings. Using this capability, the DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers can support many of the new network configurations desired in the evolving loop feeder environment.
  • Page 102 363-206-295 Applications customer location central office DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 customer location OC-3 DS1/DS3/EC-1 DS1/DS3/EC-1 Network DDM-2000 Interface DDM-2000 Network OC-3 OC-3/12 Interface DS3/EC-1 DS1/DS3/EC-1 OC-3 remote terminal DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3/12 Path OC-3/12 OC-3/12 Switched Ring Network Interface DS3/EC-1 DS3/EC-1 OC-3 remote terminal...
  • Page 103 Figure 2-14. The larger bandwidth accommodates additional DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers for DS1 access. In addition to upgrading an existing OC-3 network, the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer also provides DS3, EC-1, OC-3 or OC-3c service transport between a remote site and a CO.
  • Page 104 OC-12 Multiplexer, allowing high-speed interconnection between offices. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer is also well suited for stand-alone interoffice transport of high-capacity DS3, EC-1, and OC-3c signals. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer offers two high-speed optical interfaces: at a wavelength of 1310 nm, it supports a 51 kilometer (32 miles) span length;...
  • Page 105 363-206-295 Applications 2000 Product Family Interworking SLC-2000 Access System The SLC -2000 Access System is Lucent's next generation digital loop carrier (DLC) system. The SLC -2000 Access System can be installed in any existing pair gain application, providing telephone service, ISDN capability, DS1 pipes, and special services.

  • Page 106: Connections

    OS. Figure 2-17 shows an example of OI applications of an OC-12 ring interface between FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System and OC-12 ring systems. Refer to 824-102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guid e, for more information.
  • Page 107 363-206-295 Applications Multi-Vendor OI Applications Figure 2-18 shows a multi-vendor application partnering Lucent’s DDM-2000, FT-2000, and ITM SNC with Tellabs TITAN 5500 DCS. This OI, based on SONET standards, allows service providers to offer more flexible services to generate revenues and improve overall network maintenance efficiency. IAO LAN OC-12 OC-48...
  • Page 108 363-206-295 Applications Service Applications Loop Feeder The DDM-2000 Multiplexers provide a full set of interfaces, topologies, operations and upgradability to provide the flexibility and ease of operation required to meet the dynamic requirements of the loop feeder environment. The DDM-2000 Multiplexers are particularly suited to the evolving needs of loop feeder applications.
  • Page 109 363-206-295 Applications Broadband Business Access New telecommunications needs for customer networks include higher bandwidth services based on DS1, DS3, and STS-3c rates; a self-healing capability for businesses most sensitive to service disruption; and rapid service deployment and rearrangement to keep pace with a changing environment. The flexible, advanced capabilities of the DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers create a powerful platform along with other Lucent 2000 Product Family systems to keep pace with these dynamic customer needs.

  • Page 110: Self-Healing Medical Campus Network Application

    363-206-295 Applications OC-12 Central Offfice Central Offfice OC-48 DACS IV- DACS III- DDM-2000 FT-2000 2000 2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 Administration 5ESS Switch OC-3 Center Main Hospital OC-12 BRT-2000 Voice Outpatient Facility -2000 Data Access System ISDN OC-3 BRT-2000 Imaging Stations DDM-2000 OC-3 BRT-2000 OC-3...

  • Page 111: Sts-3C Video Broadcast Application

    STS-3c Video Broadcast Application Video applications are becoming increasingly more important in the competitive home entertainment industry. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer can be the backbone for video distribution needs as it supports two STS-3c video cross-connection types: COV - Video cross-connections at central offices...

  • Page 112: Sts-3C Video Broadcast Application For Atm Interface

    Applications STS-3c Video Application ATM Interface Figure 2-21 shows the video application for the DDM-2000 OC-12 ring used to transport STS-3c signals from one ATM switch to another. In this scenario, each OC-12 shelf is cross-connected and provisioned as COV type. This provides the capability of transmitting a point-to-point STS-3c video signal from one shelf to another.
  • Page 113 OC-3/IS-3 interfaces in its function units. These interfaces must be provisioned as 0x1. STS-3c path switching does not take place on the DDM-2000 OC-12 ring; it is executed elsewhere in the network (e.g., when the OC-12 ring transports ATM STS-3c traffic path switching is performed through the external ATM-based router).

  • Page 114: Locked (0X1) Sts-3C - Broadband Services

    363-206-295 Applications Switch OC-3c OC-3c Fn-x-2 Fn-x-1 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3c OC-3c DDM-2000 DDM-2000 Switch Switch OC-12 OC-12 OC-3c OC-3c DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 OC-12 Fn-x-1 Fn-x-2 OC-3c OC-3c Note: Fn-x designates Fn-a, Switch Fn-b, Fn-c, or Fn-d Figure 2-22. Locked (0x1) STS-3c - Broadband Services 2-35 Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 115 SCADA applications. DDM-2000 OC-3, DDM-2000 OC-12, and DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexers can be used in a flexible backbone network among electrical substations and other important sites. These systems provide an innovative "locked cross- connection"...

  • Page 116: Teleprotection And Scada Application

    363-206-295 Applications Figure 2-23 also shows an optical drop/insert DS1 extension from the SONET rings implemented with RFL 9001 Intelligent Multiplexers. This extension is useful for serving low bandwidth sites remote from the SONET backbone. The figure shows a single host DDM-2000 interconnecting the rings, but the application could be a DRI to provide node survivability.
  • Page 117 363-206-295 Applications Intelligent Vehicle Highway System (IVHS) Applications IVHSs are beginning and will grow to play a major role in the roadway systems of the future. Their primary use in the near-term is to reduce congestion. This is done in several ways. The IVHS provides more efficient and optimal traffic management which attempts to avoid congestion in the first place.

  • Page 118: Intelligent Vehicle Highway System (Ivhs) Application

    363-206-295 Applications Traffic Operations Center Roadside Hub DDM-2000 SLC 5 Roadside Hub Roadside Hub OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 VF RS-232 OC-3 OC-12 DDM-2000 DS3 Decoder DS3 Encoder OC-12 RS232 NTSC Video Matrix Switch DT Shelf OC-3 OC-12 Analog Video Optical Terminal Access Cabinet Analog Video...

  • Page 119: Sts-1/Vt1.5 Path Switched Ring Configuration

    Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Table of Contents Overview DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Shelf DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Shelf Configurations OC-12 STS-1 Path Switched Ring Shelf OC-12 STS-1/VT1.5 Path Switched Ring Configuration 3-10 OC-3/IS-3 Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) Configuration 3-11 OC-12 Ring Configuration (DS1/EC-1 Low-Speed Interfaces)
  • Page 120 DDM-2000 Fan Shelf. DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Shelf The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer is shown in Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2. Figure 3-1 is the new Group 4 shelf. The Group 4 shelf measures 14 inches high by 21.25 inches wide by 13.25 inches deep and fits in a standard 23-inch wide...

  • Page 121: Shelf Descriptions And Configurations

    fiber optic facilities and facilitate shelf loopback and fiber tests. The optical connectors are mounted on the OLIU circuit pack faceplate. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers provide Lucent's universal optical connector on all OLIUs. These OLIUs are designated by a -U. The universal optical connectors are receptacles on the faceplate of the OLIUs that allow a single OLIU ®...

  • Page 122: Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Shelf - Front View

    UP /INIT 2 (P) 2 (P) 2 (P) 2 (P) 2 (P) 2 (P) Figure 3-1. DDM-2000 OC-12 Shelf — Front View Bay MULT (B) DS1 Timing (OUT) Office Alarms (CIT, TBOS, MULT (B) Modem) Office Alarms DS1 Timing (IN) Misc.

  • Page 123: Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Plug-Ins

    363-206-295 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Table 3-1 lists the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer plug-ins. Table 3-1. DDM-2000 OC-12 Plug-Ins Product Code Functional Name Functional Designation BBF2B Synchronous Timing Generator BBF4 Synchronous Timing Generator 3 ∗ BBG11/11B Triple DS3 3DS3 BBG12 Triple EC-1 Interface...
  • Page 124 363-206-295 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations Four 12-inch slots, designated MAIN, are for the main OC-12 OLIU circuit packs. These circuit packs are arranged in two service and protection pairs designated main A and main B. Main A slots 1 and 2(P) must be equipped with 177C apparatus blanks (APPBLK) except when the shelf is used as an OC-12 Regenerator shelf.

  • Page 125: Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Front Panel

    DS3 interface connectors and shelf cables. All covers are necessary to meet the EMC guidelines set by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). DDM-2000 OC-12 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations ACTY ACTY Figure 3-3. DDM-2000 OC-12 Front Panel Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 126 363-206-295 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Shelf Configurations A DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer path switched ring shelf supports all OC-12 ring applications. The following circuit packs are required in all DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer path switched ring applications: — 177C APPBLK in the main A slots to control air flow through the shelf to ensure adequate cooling.

  • Page 127: Oc-12 Multiplexer Circuit Pack And Software Compatibility Matrix

    1X1 pair have the same circuit pack type. For multiple OLIU circuit pack types, these units can be mixed if they follow the provisioning rules. Table 3-2. DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Circuit Pack and Software Compatibility Matrix Slot Name...
  • Page 128 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations OC-12 STS-1 Path Switched Ring Shelf Figure 3-4 shows a DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer shelf equipped for an STS-1 path switched ring application. One pair of OC-12 OLIU circuit packs are located in the main B slots. The TSI slots must be equipped with TSI FLEX circuit packs.
  • Page 129 Ring Configuration Figure 3-5 shows a DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer STS-1/VT1.5 path switched ring configuration. As in the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer STS-1 ring shelf, there is one set of OC-12 interfaces and a pair of TSI FLEX circuit packs. In this configuration, however, there is also an IS-3 interface to a DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 130 OC-3/IS-3 Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) Configuration Figure 3-6 shows a DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer OC-3/IS-3 DRI configuration. The IS-3 interface provides a more economical way than three EC-1 interfaces to provide optical connectivity over a limited distance between an OC-3 ring and an OC-12 ring.
  • Page 131 363-206-295 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations OC-12 Ring Configuration (DS1/EC-1 Low-Speed Interfaces) Figure 3-7 shows an OC-12 configuration using DS1/EC-1 low-speed interfaces. Interface to the low-speed shelf is made through the IS-3 (or OC-3) circuit packs, one service and one protection pack per interface. The IS-3 circuit packs replace the OLIU circuit packs in the main slots on the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf.
  • Page 132 363-206-295 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations OC-12 Optical Extension Shelf Figure 3-8 shows an OC-12 optical extension shelf. The eight low-speed interfaces are equipped with four service and four protection OC-3 circuit packs. This configuration supports four OC-3 optical extensions; however, local drop configurations can be established by replacing OC-3 circuit packs with triple DS3, triple STS1E, or IS-3 circuit packs.
  • Page 133 Linear (1+1) Extension From OC-12 Ring Configuration Figure 3-9 shows a DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer shelf provisioned for interfacing to an OC-3 network extension. Two levels of switching are used. STS-1 level switching on the OC-12 ring to establish the STS-1 path and linear (1+1) switching of the service and protection lines on the OC-3 linear extension.

  • Page 134: Oc-12 Dual Homing Shelf

    Shelf Descriptions and Configurations OC-12 Dual Homing Shelf Figure 3-10 shows a DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf equipped for a dual homing configuration, allowing two hosts to be active on the same OC-12 ring. This allows a 0x1 application where traffic is routed to both hosts to provide host protection. In this application, two DDM-2000 OC-12 shelves are hosting one OC-3 ring.

  • Page 135: Oc-12 Sts-3C Broadcast Shelf

    Shelf Descriptions and Configurations OC-12 STS-3c Broadcast Shelf Figure 3-11 shows a DDM-2000 OC-12 CO shelf equipped for an STS-3c broadcast application. This configuration uses a pair of OC-3cs provisioned for video. Each OC-3c is split and fed onto different rotations of the ring. There is no protection switching between the function unit circuit packs (unprotected).
  • Page 136 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations OC-12 OC-3c Transport Shelf Figure 3-12 shows a DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf equipped for an OC-3c transport application. The main application of a shelf, configured in this way, is transport of video or asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) signals. Bandwidth is mapped into STS-3c "bundles,"...
  • Page 137 363-206-295 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations DDM-2000 Fan Shelf The DDM-2000 Fan Shelf (Figure 3-13) provides forced convection cooling to DDM-2000 OC-12 shelves in controlled environments (central office and controlled environment vault). POWER RESET POWER ALARM FAN FAULT REPLACE CONTROL FILTER...
  • Page 138 363-206-295 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations The fan shelf is required in all DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer applications in a controlled environment. The fan shelf is not required in OC-12 Regenerator applications. All applications should be equipped with a heat baffle as shown in ED-8C727-10 for the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer and OC-12 Regenerator shelves.

  • Page 139: Ddm-2000 Fan Shelf Switch Settings

    A filter must be installed on the bottom of the DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf. The filter is secured by spring clips that hold it in place.
  • Page 140 363-206-295 Shelf Descriptions and Configurations The following pushbuttons and LEDs are accessible through the front cover of the fan shelf: The ALARM RESET pushbutton near the left side of the front of the shelf is used to reset fan shelf alarms and register a new combination of set-point switch settings.
  • Page 141 Power Table of Contents Overview Introduction Power Description Circuit Packs OLIU Circuit Packs TSI, TGS/TG3, 3DS3, and 3STS1E Circuit Packs Control Circuit Packs LEDs Power Minor Alarm Power Distribution Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 142 This section describes the power distribution of the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. Introduction The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer is powered by −48 volts direct current. The voltages required to power the circuits within the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer are generated by DC-to-DC converters mounted on circuit packs within the shelf.

  • Page 143: Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Multiplexer Power Architecture

    -2.3V Fuse -48V -48V -48V -48V -48V -48V -48V -48V -48V -48V -48V -5.2V -5.2V 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) Main A Main B Function Units SYSCTL AUXCTL Figure 4-1. DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Power Architecture Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 144 363-206-295 Power Circuit Packs OLIU Circuit Packs The 21D/21D-U OLIU circuit pack is powered by a −48 volt to +5 volt DC-to-DC converter mounted on the circuit pack. The backplane power feeders supply A and B −48 volts to this converter via diode ORed circuits and fuses mounted on the circuit pack.
  • Page 145 363-206-295 Power LEDs Two green power on (PWR ON A and PWR ON B) LEDs on the Group 4 shelf user panel indicates that the shelf is receiving fused −48 volt power. The LEDs will remain illuminated as long as either −48 volt feeder is supplying power to the shelf.
  • Page 146 RTN (B) -48 V (B) RTN (A) -48 V (A) To DDM-2000 Shelf NOTE: Feeder size is selected per T82046-30 and EIM 90MV001, Issue 5. Typical −48 Volt Power Supply for DDM-2000 OC-12 Single Shelf Figure 4-3. Issue 1 December 1997...

  • Page 147: Transmission And Synchronization Interfaces

    Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Table of Contents Overview Transmission Interfaces OC-12 STS-1 Path Switched Ring Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) OC-3/OC-12 Ring (0x1) Low-Speed Interfaces Linear (1+1) Optical Extension Between OC-12 and OC-3 Synchronization Interfaces 5-10 Free-Running 5-10 Line Timing 5-10 DS1 External 5-10 Holdover...

  • Page 148: Transmission And Synchronization Interfaces

    This section describes the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer transmission and synchronization interfaces. Transmission Interfaces The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer supports DS3, OC-3, EC-1, and OC-3c low- speed interfaces and an OC-12 high-speed interface at both 1310 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer provides four low-speed function units (FN).

  • Page 149: Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Multiplexer Application Summary Matrix

    ∗ Requires OC-3 shelf in addition to OC-12 shelf. OC-12 STS-1 Path Switched Ring Figure 5-1 is an overall block diagram of a DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer STS-1/ VT1.5 path switched ring node. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer ring supports DS3 and EC-1 low-speed interfaces in an STS-1 path switched ring configuration, 0x1 OC-3/IS-3 interfaces in an STS-1/VT1.5 path switched ring configuration, and...

  • Page 150: Multiplexer Block Diagram - Sts-1/Vt1.5 Path Switched Ring Node

    3STS1E 2(P) 2(P) EC-1 BCP3 23-Type OC-12 OLIU 2(P) 3DS3 STS-1 OC-3/IS-3 2(P) DDM-2000 OC-12 0 x 1 STS-1/VT1.5 Path To/From 21-Type STS-1 Switched Ring Node. OC-3 Ring OLIU VT1.5 Path Switching Requires OC-3 shelf. OC3/IS-3 Figure 5-1. OC-12 Multiplexer Block Diagram — STS-1/VT1.5 Path Switched Ring...

  • Page 151: Oc-3/Oc-12 Ring (0X1) Low-Speed Interfaces

    DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer path switched ring (Figure 5-1). In this configuration, the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer can provide STS-1 DRI with another DDM-2000 OC-12 ring, a DDM-2000 OC-3 ring, or an FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System ring with redundant signal appearances at the two central offices via EC-1/OC-3/OC-3c/IS-3/IS-3c and DS3 interfaces (see...
  • Page 152 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Ring Ring Ring Ring Main B-1 Main B-2 21-Type OLIUS DDM-2000 OC-12 Shelf FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 OC-3 OC-3 Main-1 Main-2 22-Type OLIU 22-Type OLIU DDM-2000 OC-3 Shelf DS1/DS3/EC-1/OC-3 Figure 5-2. OC-3/OC-12 Ring (0x1) Low-Speed Interfaces — Single Homing...
  • Page 153 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces See Figure 5-3. For dual homed 0x1 ring applications, one function unit slot on the OC-12 shelf must be empty. When the OC-12 shelf is provisioned for 0x1 (default) operation, incoming Ring 1 (incoming to main B-1) always feeds (is locked to) function unit ( )-1 and, therefore, main-1 of the OC-3 shelf.

  • Page 154: Oc-3/Oc-12 Ring Low-Speed Interfaces (0X1)

    363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Main B-2 Main B-2 Main B-1 Main B-1 21-Type 21-Type DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OLIU OLIUS OC-12 Shelf OC-12 Shelf FN ( )-1 FN ( )-2 FN ( )-2 FN ( )-1 OC-3 OC-3...

  • Page 155: Ring Shelf With Linear (1+1) Oc-3 Low-Speed Interfaces (Transmit)

    Linear (1+1) Optical Extension Between OC-12 and OC-3 See Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5. The function units in the DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf can contain linear (1+1) protected OC-3/IS-3 circuit packs. This allows a DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf to connect to the main slots of a DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf.

  • Page 156: Ring Shelf With Linear (1+1) Oc-3 Low-Speed Interfaces (Receive)

    363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Note that for OC-12 OLIU or incoming STS-1 path failure, the STS path switch takes place in the TSI. For TSI circuit pack failure, the switch occurs in the function unit OLIUs. Ring Ring Ring Ring STS-1 Path Switch (Switched Together)
  • Page 157 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Synchronization Interfaces Each DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer can be provisioned to one of three timing modes: Free-running from an internal oscillator Line timing from an incoming optical interface. This timing reference is used to generate all outgoing signals. Line timing is an intermediate node that derives timing from the incoming fiber.
  • Page 158 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Thus, each TG circuit pack has two DS1 references to choose from, one which is input directly and the other cross-fed. Both TG circuit packs will normally select the same DS1 input. A loss of both DS1 references results in the TG circuit pack entering holdover mode.
  • Page 159 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces DS1 Output Mode, SYNC OUT In a CO environment, it may be necessary to externally synchronize a BITS to a SONET reference with traceability to a primary reference source (PRS). When optioned for SYNC OUT the DDM-2000 will output a derived DS1 traceable to a selected OC-12 input.
  • Page 160 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Free-Running Loop-Timed OC-12 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DS3/OC3/OC3c DS3/OC3/OC3c Small CO or RT (a) Free-Running/Loop-Timing Configuration Clock Source (Stratum 3 or better) Loop-Timed DS1 Timing Channel Output Bank or BITS Clock OC-12 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DS3/OC3/OC3c DS3/OC3/OC3c (b) External Timing/Loop-Timing Configuration Figure 5-6.

  • Page 161: Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Multiplexer Synchronization

    See 363-206-200, DDM-2000 Multiplexer Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide , for more synchronization information. Table 5-2 summarizes the DDM-2000 OC-12 synchronization modes for the current software release. Table 5-2. DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Synchronization Application Ring (R7.0)
  • Page 162 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Clock Source External Clock (Stratum 3 or better) (Stratum 3 or better) Derived DS1 Timing Output From Sync Out Mode OC-12 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DS31/OC3/OC3c DS3/OC3/OC3c (c) External Timing Configuration Clock Source External Clock May be Plesiochronous (Stratum 3 or better) (Stratum 3 or better) OC-12...
  • Page 163 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Synchronization Messaging SONET synchronization messaging is used to communicate the quality of subnetwork timing, internal timing status, and timing states throughout a subnetwork. Transitions to and from holdover or between OC-12 references, for shelf timing, and to and from DS1 AIS, for the DS1 output, are based on synchronization messages received over the OC-12 line from which the DDM-2000 system is extracting timing.
  • Page 164 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces DS1 Timing Output Integrity The DS1 timing outputs are typically used to distribute timing from the BITS clock in one office (master) to the BITS clock in the next office (slave), using the SONET transmission facilities between them as the synchronization vehicle. The BITS are typically of stratum 2 or stratum 3 accuracy.

  • Page 165: Ds1 Timing Output - Dual Homing Linear

    363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces As shown in Figure 5-7a (Figure 5-7 is an OC-3 linear application used to explain the concepts of synchronization messaging.), SONET synchronization messaging notifies the DDM-2000 Multiplexer at the slave site to place alarm indication signal (AIS) on the DS1 timing output.
  • Page 166 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Automatic Synchronization Reconfiguration SONET was designed to operate optimally in a synchronous environment. Although plesiochronous and asynchronous operation can be supported through the use of pointer adjustments, transmission quality is affected by the generation of additional jitter and wander due to pointer adjustments. Because of this, it is desirable to maintain synchronous operation whenever possible.
  • Page 167 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Consider the access ring network in Figure 5-8. Under normal operation, the ring has one DDM-2000 Multiplexer externally timed and the others line-timed in the counterclockwise direction. If a fiber failure occurs between the first two DDM-2000 Multiplexers, the automatic synchronization reconfiguration feature will cause the DDM-2000 Multiplexers to change their line-timed directions to clockwise.

  • Page 168: Synchronization Messages Using K2 Byte

    1-3 of the K2 byte found in the SONET overhead. In OC-12 Release 5.1 and later releases, synchronization messaging can also be done using bits 5-8 of the S1 byte in the SONET overhead. If a DDM-2000 OC-12 system is deriving timing from a given OC-N interface, and synchronization messaging is enabled on that interface (Kbyte messages and Sbyte messages in OC-12 Release 5.1 and later are provisioned using the set-ocn command), the system interprets...

  • Page 169: Synchronization Messages Using S1 Byte

    The "Don't Use" message is sent when the system determines that its timing is not suitable for synchronization; for example, due to failure. When the DDM-2000 OC-12 system is configured for external timing and its DS1 output port is provisioned for MULT mode, the message Sync Quality Unknown (SQU) for K byte, or Sync Trace Unknown (STU) for S byte, is sent on all the OC-N interfaces where synchronization messaging is provisioned.
  • Page 170 SQU for K byte, or STU for S byte, will be transmitted on all OC-N interfaces. When the DDM-2000 OC-12 system is configured for free-run or is in holdover mode, the Internal Clock message for K byte, or Traceable SONET minimum Clk for S byte, will be sent on all OC-N interfaces where synchronization messaging is provisioned.
  • Page 171 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces For DDM-2000 OC-3, function unit C, when equipped with an OC-3/IS-3 OLIU, can be selected as an option for automatic synchronization reconfiguration. This is useful in DRI networks where an OC-3 ring is connected through an OC-3/IS-3 optical interface to an OC-12 or FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System ring.
  • Page 172 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces The sync quality unknown (SQU) message is sent to indicate where timing is traceable to an external BITS and where it is valid to be used. Automatic synchronization reconfiguration is not an option for externally timed DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexers;...
  • Page 173 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces In Figure 5-9b, a fiber has been cut between sites A and B. Immediately the DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer at site B changes the format of its derived DS1 to AIS. This forces the BITS clock at site B to enter holdover or switch input source (if a valid one is available).
  • Page 174 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Synchronization Reconfiguration in an Access Ring Figure 5-10a shows the access ring operating in its normal configuration. The DDM-2000 Multiplexer at the CO is externally timed, and each of the other DDM-2000 Multiplexers are line timed in a counterclockwise direction. The SQU message is sent to indicate where timing is traceable to an external BITS and where it is valid to be used.
  • Page 175 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces In Figure 5-10c, the DDM-2000 Multiplexer at site C detects the incoming IC message and sends out the IC message to site D. The DDM-2000 Multiplexer at site C cannot switch to line time from the other rotation because it is receiving the TLB message on that interface and continues to derive timing from Site B.
  • Page 176 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces In Figure 5-10e, the DDM-2000 Multiplexer at site C detects the incoming SQU message from site D. The SQU message is a better quality message than the IC message being received from site B, so the DDM-2000 Multiplexer at site C switches to line time from site D.
  • Page 177 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces Network Timing Distribution DS1 signals have long been used to pass timing information through the network synchronization hierarchy. These DS1 timing references should be transmitted between master and slave clock sources over the most reliable facilities available. In some cases, these DS1 signals also carry traffic.
  • Page 178 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces With OC-N timing distribution, the OC-N line signal, rather than a DS1 multiplexed into the SONET payload, will provide a timing transport mechanism better suited to a complex, heavily interconnected SONET network. In this configuration, a DS1 reference from the CO BITS clock still times the OC-N transmitted to the remote site;...
  • Page 179 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces OC-N timing distribution has several potential advantages. It preserves transport bandwidth for customer services and guarantees a high-quality timing signal. Also, as the CO architecture evolves to replace DSX interconnects with SONET EC-1 and IS-3 interconnects and direct OC-N interfaces, OC-N distribution becomes more efficient than multiplexing DS1 references into an access facility in the CO.
  • Page 180 363-206-295 Transmission and Synchronization Interfaces It is recommended that, where possible, the DS1 sources (switch, PBX, or other equipment) be traceable to the same timing source used to time the DDM-2000 SONET network. Multiplexed DS1 reference transport is also consistent with current planning and administration methods.
  • Page 181 Operations Interfaces Table of Contents Overview Craft Interface Terminals (CIT) Local Access Using a PC as a CIT Modem Access Remote Access Using the Data Communications Channel (DCC) CPro-2000 Graphical User Interface and Provisioning Tool User Panel User Panel LEDs 6-10 FE SEL Pushbutton 6-10...
  • Page 182 Operations Interfaces Overview This section presents the operations interfaces that support technician and provisioning access to the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer and allow alarms and status information generated by the system to be reported. Operations interfaces include: Two EIA-232-D craft interface terminal (CIT) interfaces...

  • Page 183: Operations Interfaces

    363-206-295 Operations Interfaces Craft Interface Terminals (CIT) The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer supports three types of access mechanisms through the CIT that can be supported simultaneously. Local access Remote access via a modem port Remote access via the data communications channel (DCC).

  • Page 184: Operations Interfaces

    363-206-295 Operations Interfaces Table 6-1. Craft Interface Terminals AT&T 610 terminal DEC § VT100 terminal AT&T 615 terminal ADM 5A terminal AT&T 630 terminal HP ¶ 2621 terminal AT&T 730 terminal HP 2623 terminal HP 110 computer** AT&T 5425 terminal† AT&T 6286 WGS computer‡...

  • Page 185: Craft Interface Terminal Connectors

    363-206-295 Operations Interfaces Local Access Figure 6-1 shows the system has two EIA-232-D compatible interfaces for a CIT. The front access interface is configured as data communications equipment (DCE) for direct CIT access (CIT 1). The rear access CIT interface (CIT 2) is configured as data terminal equipment (DTE) to allow a permanent modem connection without requiring a null modem.

  • Page 186: Craft Interface Terminal Login Sessions

    Figure 6-2. Craft Interface Terminal Login Sessions The DDM-2000 OC-12 CIT interface is based on the Bellcore TL1 language and provides prompt and command modes of operation. On-line context sensitive help is always available to help the technician through command execution. The output messages and reports are presented in easy-to-read sentences and tables.
  • Page 187 Any MS-DOS PC can be used to emulate a traditional CIT through a variety of low-cost terminal emulator software packages; thus, an MS-DOS PC can serve DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer needs very efficiently. In addition, the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer user interface can be accessed from within Windows (Version 3.0 or later) on an MS-DOS PC.
  • Page 188 3170 computer and the AT&T Safari computer have a built-in modem and meet the modem requirements. The following stand-alone modems meet the modem requirements and can be used with the DDM-2000 OC-12 system. This is not an exhaustive list of compatible modems: † Paradyne...
  • Page 189 Microsoft Windows based user interface that can optionally be used with the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. The tool simplifies and mechanizes administration, maintenance, and provisioning operations. With the tool a user can: Display and control cross-connections at each NE in a ring and the entire ring, including dual ring interworking (DRI) (for example, drop and continue paths at DRI nodes).
  • Page 190 363-206-295 Operations Interfaces AUXCTL BCP4 S1:1 O H CTL -48V A Fuse FAULT Lucent FAU LT -48V B Fuse Critical Alarm Major Alarm SYSCTL Minor Alarm BBG8 S1:1 Power Minor Alarm YSCTL ACO/LED Test FAULT Lucent Power On A FA U LT Power On B TIV E Abnormal...
  • Page 191 7-segment FE ID is blank. FE SEL Pushbutton In previous DDM-2000 OC-12 releases the FE SEL pushbutton allowed technicians to see far-end DDM-2000 conditions from the local shelf. Starting with OC-12 Release 7.0 and all later OC-12 TARP releases, when the FE SEL pushbutton is pushed for the first time, the FE ID display shows "L"...

  • Page 192: Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Pushbutton Combinations

    The three pushbuttons described previously are used in combinations to perform seven functions. Table 6-2 lists the functions. These functions are used as part of the procedures described in the TOP section of this manual (Volume II). Table 6-2. DDM-2000 OC-12 Pushbutton Combinations Pushbutton Function ACO/TST...
  • Page 193 363-206-295 Operations Interfaces Equipment Indicators FAULT Indicators Red FAULT indicators are provided on all circuit packs. Retainer cards and the BBF5 JMPR circuit pack do not have LEDs. The circuit pack FAULT indicator is lit whenever a failure has been isolated to that pack. Common failures (for example, power, synchronization, control, etc.) do not cause the FAULT indicators on all circuit packs affected by the failure to be lit;...
  • Page 194 363-206-295 Operations Interfaces Office Alarms The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer provides relay contacts for wiring to the office audible and visual alarms. Contacts are provided for each alarm condition: CR (critical), MJ (major), and MN (minor). The MJ and CR contact closures are designed to allow these office alarms to be ORed together and reported as an office MJ alarm.
  • Page 195 Operations Interfaces TL1/X.25 Interface The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer supports a TL1/X.25 interface via a rear access, synchronous, EIA-232-D port capable of speeds of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19,200 baud to control and report alarm and status conditions and PM data to an alarm surveillance OS such as Bellcore's NMA.
  • Page 196 10 Mb/s over 4-wire twisted pair cables (per Bellcore GR-253, ANSI/ IEEE 802.2 [ISO 8802-2] and ANSI/IEEE 802.3 [ISO 8802-3]). See also 824-102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide. This feature will be useful when upgrading from DDM-2000 OC-3 R13.0 and OC-12 R7.0 to subsequent releases.
  • Page 197 Discretes Environmental Alarms and — Controls To allow monitoring and control of equipment in a DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer, a set of user-definable miscellaneous discrete environmental alarms and controls is provided. Twenty-one miscellaneous discrete alarm/status points are provided to monitor environmental conditions in a DDM-2000 shelf (open door, high temperature, etc.).
  • Page 198 363-206-295 Operations Interfaces Remote Terminal Central Office Misc. Alarm/Status Inputs Input Common -48V External Minor CIT or TL1/X.25 -48V Power Minor Fan Control Fan Unit (cabinet) Output Misc. Control Outputs Output Common tpa 852346/01 Figure 6-4. Miscellaneous Discretes 6-17 Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 199 Circuit Pack Descriptions Table of Contents Overview Introduction Compatibility Universal Optical Connector Control Control Circuit Packs BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Faceplate Controls and Indicators General Description of Operation Detailed Description of Operation BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Hardware Setting 7-10 BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Quick Reference Summary 7-11...
  • Page 200 Table of Contents TG Faceplate Indicators 7-17 General Description of Operation 7-18 Detailed Description of Operation 7-19 TG Hardware Settings 7-22 TG Quick Reference Summary 7-24 Transmission 7-25 BBG11 3DS3 Circuit Pack Description 7-25 Purpose of Circuit 7-25 BBG11 3DS3 Faceplate Indicators 7-25 General Description of Operation 7-26...
  • Page 201 Table of Contents 21D/21D-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description 7-51 Purpose of Circuit 7-51 21D and 21D-U OLIU Faceplate Indicators 7-51 General Description of Operation 7-52 Detailed Description of Operation 7-52 21D/21D-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary 7-55 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description 7-56 Purpose of Circuit 7-56...
  • Page 202 Overview This section provides a detailed functional description of the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer circuit packs. Introduction The circuit packs in the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer are divided into three main categories: Control circuit packs — BBG8/BBG8B system controller (SYSCTL) — BCP4 overhead controller (OHCTL) Synchronization circuit pack —...

  • Page 203: Circuit Pack Descriptions

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Compatibility The BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL, BBF2B TGS, BBF4 TG3, 21D/21D-U OLIU, and 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU circuit packs are common to both the DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers. Universal Optical Connector Circuit packs having a "-U" after their designation indicate that these circuit packs have a universal optical connector.

  • Page 204: Universal Optical Connector

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Faceplate-mounted block that universally accepts , SC, or FC buildout A2070 / A3070 Buildout (White) ®-Type A3080 Buildout (White) FC - Type A2060 / A3060 Buildout (Blue) SC - Type Figure 7-1. Universal Optical Connector Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 205 Control The control system controls and reports the status of the transmission signal through the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. All system features are implemented or supported through the control system. However, transmission is unaffected by control system failure. If a controller does fail, protection switches are not done.
  • Page 206 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL circuit pack is the main system controller in the system. Together with its companion OHCTL, it has control over all shelf functions and provides all user interfaces into the system. The BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL must be used with the BCP4 OHCTL.
  • Page 207 Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory FEPROM allows in-service software upgrades to be performed locally or remotely without replacing the SYSCTL circuit pack. Program upgrades of remote DDM-2000 OC-12 shelves can also be done via the overhead channel from the central office (CO). Of course, software upgrades may also be accomplished by replacing circuit packs with packs that have already had software upgrades.

  • Page 208: Bbg8/Bbg8B Sysctl Circuit Pack

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Fault Sanity Processor Timer 7-Segment LED Display FE and Update/ Initialize Buttons User Panel LED’s and ACO Button Memory Interface User Interfaces Office Alarms Intrashelf Control Miscellaneous Internal Discretes Interfaces Inputs/Outputs Intershelf Control Control Main Processor Bus AUXCTL Power Monitor...
  • Page 209 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Transmission/Timing Circuit Pack Interfaces The main processor can read and write parameters on the transmission circuit packs through a custom serial interface called the intra-shelf control bus. These circuit packs have a built-in serial link receiver which provides an address map into the device.
  • Page 210 The SYSCTL interfaces with SYSCTLs of other DDM-2000 OC-12 shelves through intershelf cabling. This interface allows the user to access each DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf in a bay via a modem or craft interface terminal (CIT) connected to any shelf in that bay.

  • Page 211: Bbg8/Bbg8B Sysctl Option Switches

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Hardware Setting The BBG8/BBG8B has two hardware switches, Switch 1 (S1) for Product Identification (see Figure 7-4) and Switch 2 (S2) for TBOS Termination used with Release 5.x and earlier releases. Settings for S2 are not applicable for Release 7.0 and later releases.
  • Page 212 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Quick Reference Summary Interface Functions Intra-shelf interface functions performed by the SYSCTL are as follows: Direct control of other circuit packs via a serial control link and intra-shelf control bus Control of circuit pack and user panel LEDs Detecting the presence of, and identifying, circuit packs installed in the system.

  • Page 213: Bcp4 Ohctl Circuit Pack

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BCP4 OHCTL Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The OHCTL circuit pack is used in conjunction with the BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL. It provides overhead channel interfaces for the system. Faceplate Indicator The OHCTL circuit pack faceplate indicator is shown in Figure 7-5. The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack failure.
  • Page 214 Controls The system provides four miscellaneous discrete control outputs and 21 miscellaneous discrete alarm/status inputs when the DDM-2000 OC-12 is configured as an RT. For this application, the SYSCTL supplies all of the necessary miscellaneous discrete I/O. Alarms are reported via CIT or TL1/X.25.

  • Page 215: Bcp4 Ohctl Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions SONET To/From Main Orderwire Transport To/From SONET And Function Channel Overhead Orderwire Overhead Unit Slots Shelf Processors (Service And Protection) To/From Messages Main Operations Processors Center Intra-shelf Processor To/From Memory SYSCTL Inter-shelf To/From Miscellaneous Control To/From Co-located Discrete SYSCTL...
  • Page 216 SONET overhead channel interface to OLIU circuit packs User-definable miscellaneous discrete environmental alarm and status outputs for monitoring auxiliary remote site equipment used with a DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf An X.25 message-based operations interface Inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.) Intra-office LAN interface.
  • Page 217 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Synchronization Synchronization Functions The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer supports three synchronization modes: DS1 timing input from stratum 3 or better office clock for CO applications Free-running in CO applications when external timing inputs are not available Line (formerly loop) timing for remote timing functions.

  • Page 218: Bbf2B Tgs And Bbf4 Tg3 Circuit Pack

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions TG Faceplate Indicators The TG circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7-7. The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack hardware failure or improper switch settings. The red FAULT LED flashes in the event of an incoming DS1 timing reference failure.
  • Page 219 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The TG circuit pack provides timing signals to the DDM-2000 OC-12 circuit packs. The TG circuit pack is microprocessor controlled and has the capability to synchronize to external DS1 references or to loop references from an incoming optical signal.

  • Page 220: Bbf2B Tgs And Bbf4 Tg3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation Control Circuitry Figure 7-8 is an overall block diagrams of the BBF2B TGS and BBF4 TG3 circuit packs. The TG circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. Through this interface, the SYSCTL monitors the health of the TG circuit pack to provide alarm reporting.
  • Page 221 MULT or SYNC OUT mode via a hardware switch. In the SYNC OUT mode, the derived DS1 output signal is generated from the incoming OC-N lines through timing synchronization signals from the DDM-2000 OC-12 main OLIUs (main-b-1 or main-b-2), which is the default. In the MULT mode, the DS1 output signal is buffered from an external DS1 input reference.
  • Page 222 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Clock Output Functions Intra-shelf Timing Distribution. The generated timing signals are distributed through output drivers to the main and function unit slots. The TG circuit pack provides eight differential 51.84-MHz master clock signals and eight differential 8-kHz composite STS-1 frame sync signals.
  • Page 223 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Fault Detection Circuitry The TG circuit pack has in-service and out-of-service built-in test capability. In- service testing is continuous and errors are reported when they occur to the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. An out-of-service test is performed whenever the TG circuit pack is inserted or recovers from a transient failure.
  • Page 224 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Figure 7-9 shows the location of the option switches for the BBF2B TGS circuit pack. Edge Connector Component Side Figure 7-9. TG Option Switches for DDM-2000 OC-3 (Sheet 1 of 2) Notes: 1. The switches are set by moving the slide toward the desired position. 2.
  • Page 225 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Equalizer Switch Settings Equalization (Note) S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 0' to 131' 131' to 262' 262' to 393' 393' to 524' 524' to 655' Invalid Invalid Invalid Note: Distance in feet for 22 gauge PIC (ABAM) cable Figure 7-9.

  • Page 226: Bbg11 3Ds3 Circuit Pack

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Transmission The transmission circuit packs are the BBG11 3DS3, BBG11B 3DS3, BBG12 3STS1E, BCP3 TSI FLEX, 21D/21D-U OLIU, 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU, 23G/ 23G-U OLIU, and the 23H/23H-U OLIU. BBG11 3DS3 Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBG11 3DS3 circuit pack provides a low-speed interface between asynchronous DS3 rate signals and SONET standard STS-1 signals.
  • Page 227 General Description of Operation The BBG11 3DS3 circuit pack provides bidirectional transport of three DS3 signals through the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer in either clear channel (CC) mode, violation monitor and removal (VMR) mode, or violation monitor (VM) mode by mapping the DS3 into an STS-1 signal. The 3DS3 circuit pack performs maintenance and provisioning functions associated with the STS-1 and DS3 signals and provides access to the STS-1 path overhead.

  • Page 228: Bbg11 3Ds3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Companion Hybrid Receiver Loopback Synchronizer To/From To/From Protection TSI CPs Loopback 3 STS-1 3 DS3s Relays DSX-3 (Service & Desynchronizer Protection) From Timing TSI CPs Driver (Service & Protection) From -48V A Shelf -48V B -48V Fuses Intrashelf To/From...
  • Page 229 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Circuitry The BBG11 3DS3 circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. Redundancy in the intra-shelf control bus assures the level of control required to perform protection switching and alarming of a faulty circuit pack. The BBG11 3DS3 provides maintenance elements for reporting the status of the circuit pack, status of the incoming STS-1 and DS3 signals, as well as the circuit pack inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.).
  • Page 230 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions On the BBG11 3DS3 side, the DS3 inputs from a DSX-3 are sent to both the active and standby BBG11 3DS3 circuit packs. Only the active unit selects the DS3 input. The SYSCTL circuit pack supervises the state of the active and standby units so that the relay state of each is always the inverse of the other.

  • Page 231: 3Ds3 Line Build-Out (Lbo) Jumpers

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG11 3DS3 Hardware Settings The location of the BBG11 3DS3 circuit pack line build-out (LBO) jumpers is shown in Figure 7-12. The 3DS3 LBO settings are shown in the table. LBO IN Edge Connector LBO OUT Component Side 3DS3 LBO Settings Cable Length (Ft)
  • Page 232 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG11 3DS3 Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions The 3DS3 circuit pack transmit functions are as follows: Receives three B3ZS encoded DS3 signals from a DSX-3 Recovers three DS3 clocks and nonreturn to zero (NRZ) data Synchronizes the data signals to STS-1 signal rate Inserts STS-1 path overhead Provides three STS-1 signals to the TSI circuit packs.
  • Page 233 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG11B 3DS3 Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBG11B 3DS3 circuit pack provides a low-speed interface between asynchronous DS3 rate signals and SONET standard STS-1 signals. The BBG11B provides the same functions as the BBG11 and can be used in place of the BBG11 in all applications.
  • Page 234 General Description of Operation The BBG11B 3DS3 circuit pack provides bidirectional transport of three DS3 signals through the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer in either clear channel (CC) mode, violation monitor and removal (VMR) mode, or violation monitor (VM) mode, by mapping the DS3 into an STS-1 signal. The BBG11B 3DS3 circuit pack performs maintenance and provisioning functions associated with the STS-1 and DS3 signals and provides access to the STS-1 path overhead.

  • Page 235: Bbg11B 3Ds3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Companion Hybrid Receiver Loopback Synchronizer To/From To/From Protection TSI CPs Loopback 3 STS-1 3 DS3s Relays DSX-3 (Service & Desynchronizer Protection) From Timing TSI CPs Driver (Service & Protection) From -48V A Shelf -48V B -48V Fuses Intrashelf To/From...
  • Page 236 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Control Circuitry The BBG11B 3DS3 circuit pack interfaces with the SYSCTL via the intra-shelf control bus. Redundancy in the intra-shelf control bus assures the level of control required to perform protection switching and alarming of a faulty circuit pack. The BBG11B 3DS3 provides maintenance elements for reporting the status of the circuit pack, status of the incoming STS-1 and DS3 signals, as well as the circuit pack inventory information ( CLEI code, date of manufacture, etc.).
  • Page 237 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions On the BBG11B 3DS3 side, the DS3 inputs from a DSX-3 are sent to both the active and standby BBG11B 3DS3 circuit packs. Only the active unit selects the DS3 input. The SYSCTL circuit pack supervises the state of the active and standby units so that the relay state of each is always the inverse of the other.

  • Page 238: 3Ds3 Line Build-Out Jumpers

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Power Circuitry The BBG11B 3DS3 circuit pack receives two sources of −48 volts that are in turn diode ORed, fused, and filtered before conversion to +5 volts to power the rest of the circuit pack. A failure of the fuse or converter causes the red FAULT LED to light.
  • Page 239 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG11B 3DS3 Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions The 3DS3 circuit pack transmit functions are as follows: Receives three B3ZS encoded DS3 signals from a DSX-3 Recovers three DS3 clocks and NRZ data Optionally checks and/or corrects P-bit parity errors Synchronizes the data signals to STS-1 signal rate Inserts STS-1 path overhead Provides three STS-1 signals to the TSI circuit packs.
  • Page 240 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Maintenance Signal Functions The major maintenance signal functions are as follows: Detects STS-1 path AIS coming from the fiber Detects STS-1 path unequipped signal coming from the fiber Inserts DS3 AIS toward the fiber and DSX-3 Detects DS3 AIS coming from the fiber Detects DS3 OOF coming from the fiber Detects DS3 B3ZS violation threshold crossings from the DSX-3...

  • Page 241: Bbg12 3Sts1E Circuit Pack

    BBG12 3STS1E Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BBG12 3STS1E circuit pack provides bidirectional transport of up to three EC-1 signals through the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. BBG12 3STS1E Faceplate Indicators The BBG12 3STS1E circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7-16.
  • Page 242 General Description of Operation The BBG12 3STS1E circuit pack provides bidirectional transport of three EC-1 signals through the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. The 3STS1E circuit pack performs maintenance and provisioning functions associated with the STS-1 and EC-1 signals. The 3STS1E circuit pack interfaces to the TSI circuit pack at the STS-1 rate, to the STSX-1, and to the SYSCTL, and it receives timing signals from the TSI circuit pack.

  • Page 243: Bbg12 3Sts1E Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions To/From Companion EC-1 STS-1 Hybrid Receiver Pointer Processor To/From To/From Protection TSI CPs Loopback 3 STS-1 3 EC-1s Relays STSX-1 (Service & Protection) STS-1 From Byte Timing EC-1 TSI CPs Processing Driver (Service & Protection) From -48V A Shelf -48V B...
  • Page 244 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions On the BBG12 3STS1E side, the EC-1 inputs from an STSX-1 cross-connection panel are sent to both the active and standby BBG12 3STS1E circuit packs. Only the active unit selects the EC-1 input. The SYSCTL circuit pack supervises the state of the active and standby units so that the relay state of each is always the inverse of the other.
  • Page 245 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG12 3STS1E Hardware Settings The location of the BBG12 3STS1E circuit pack LBO jumpers is shown in Figure 7-18. The 3STS1E LBO settings are shown in the table. LBO IN Edge Connector LBO OUT Component Side 3STS1E LBO Settings Cable Length (Ft) LBO Setting...
  • Page 246 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BBG12 3STS1E Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions The 3STS1E circuit pack transmit functions are as follows: Receives three B3ZS-encoded EC-1 signals from an STSX-1 Recovers three STS-1 clocks from three incoming data streams B3ZS decodes and descrambles three incoming data streams Frame synchronizes the incoming EC-1 signal using the STS-1 pointer processor Provides three STS-1 signals to the TSI circuit packs.

  • Page 247: Bcp3 Circuit Pack

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BCP3 TSI FLEX Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The BCP3 time slot interchange flexible (TSI FLEX) circuit pack provides a programmable TSI interface between the main-b circuit packs and the function units circuit packs and distributes timing from the TGS circuit packs to the transmission circuit packs.
  • Page 248 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The BCP3 provides the 51.84 MHz clock and the 8-kHz frame pulse to all main-b and function units service and protection circuit packs. In the receive direction, the BCP3 receives twelve 51.84 Mb/s STS-1s from an active main-b circuit pack and groups them into sets of three STS-1s.

  • Page 249: Bcp3 Circuit Pack Block Diagram

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions From TSI Clock & Frame Companion From TGS Main B - (Service & Protection) TGS Clock & Frame Clock & Frame Timing (Service & Function Units - (Service & Protection) Circuits Protection) Companion TSI Clock Frame 12 STS-1 12 STS-1 To Main B...
  • Page 250 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Maintenance Features and Modes The BCP3 circuit pack communicates with the SYSCTL circuit pack via a control interface. Transmit Direction. The BCP3 receives 12 sets of STS-1 data signals, one each from the active and standby function unit circuit packs. One set is selected by SYSCTL request.
  • Page 251 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions BCP3 Quick Reference Summary Interface Functions STS-1 signal interface functions performed by the BCP3 are as follows: Transmission of selected STS-1 signals from function units to the main-b circuit packs Transmission of selected STS-1 signals from main-b to the function unit circuit packs.
  • Page 252 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 21D/21D-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The 21D/21D-U OLIU circuit pack is used to interconnect colocated OC-3 and OC-12 shelves at the OC-3 rate. It performs the optical/electrical conversion between the optical interconnect signal level 3 (IS-3) and STS-3 signals. It also does the multiplexing between STS-3 and three STS-1 signals and provides SONET transport overhead access.
  • Page 253 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The 21D/21D-U OLIU circuit pack multiplexes three STS-1 signals to an STS-3, inserts the SONET transport overhead bytes (line and section), and scrambles the resulting signal. This STS-3 signal drives an LED transmitter to create the IS-3 output. The received IS-3 signal is converted back to an electrical STS-3.
  • Page 254 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Transmission Circuitry Transmit Direction. The 21D/21D-U OLIU circuitry selects the three STS-1 signals from the TSI, adds SONET transport overhead, then byte-interleaves and scrambles the signal in a frame synchronous scrambler. The output from the multiplexer is an STS-3 signal that is used to amplitude modulate the LED transmitter, converting the electrical signal to an NRZ-encoded IS-3 optical signal.
  • Page 255 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Protection Circuitry Optional 1+1 nonrevertive unidirectional line protection switching compliant with SONET specifications is provided. The 21D/21D-U OLIU is protection switched by the SYSCTL in response to an external command, incoming signal failure, or internal equipment fault. The 21D/21D-U OLIU circuit pack is protection switched with the IS-3 line.
  • Page 256 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 21D/21D-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions Major transmit functions of the 21D/21D-U OLIU circuit pack are as follows: Selects STS-1 inputs from TSI circuit packs Adds SONET transport overhead Byte-interleaves and scrambles the three selected STS-1 or optional STS-3c signals to produce an STS-3 or STS-3c signal Converts the STS-3 or STS-3c signal to an IS-3 or IS-3c optical signal for transmission over the optical fiber.
  • Page 257 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU circuit pack performs the optical/electrical conversion between the OC-3 and STS-3 signals, multiplexing/demultiplexing between STS-3 and three STS-1 signals and SONET transport overhead access. The 21G/21G-U/21G2-U can be used in either the main or function unit slots in an OC-3 shelf, or the function unit slots only in an OC-12.
  • Page 258 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU multiplexes three STS-1 signals to an STS-3, inserts the SONET transport overhead bytes (line and section), and scrambles the resulting signal. This STS-3 signal drives the laser transmitter to create the OC-3 output. The received OC-3 signal is converted back to an electrical STS-3.
  • Page 259 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Multiplexer OC-3 Tx Fiber Byte Interleaves STS-1 #1 3 STS-1s into STS-1 #2 a STS-3 STS-1 STS-1 #3 Write Section Routing STS-1 and Line OH Bytes of STS-1 #1 To/From Converts STS-3 STS-1 TSI CPs into OC-3 (Service &...
  • Page 260 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Transmission Circuitry Transmit Direction. The STS-1 router selects three of the STS-1 signals received from other main and function unit slots, or from TSI slots in the OC-12 shelf, and sends them to the multiplexer. The multiplexer circuitry takes the three STS-1 signals from the output of the router, adds SONET transport overhead, then byte- interleaves and scrambles the signal in a frame synchronous scrambler.
  • Page 261 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Protection Circuitry Optional 1+1 nonrevertive unidirectional line protection switching compliant with SONET specifications is provided. The 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU is protection switched by the SYSCTL in response to an external command, incoming signal failure, or internal equipment fault. The 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU circuit pack is protection switched with the optical line.
  • Page 262 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 21G/21G-U OLIU Hardware Settings The location of the 21G/21G-U OLIU circuit pack optical power output level switch is shown in Figure 7-25. This switch allows the 21G/21G-U OLIU to be looped back without an external optical attenuator cable. The optical power output level switch in the LOW POWER position attenuates the transmit optical power by 5 dB.
  • Page 263 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions The following are the major transmit functions of the 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU circuit pack: Selects STS-1 inputs from MXRVO, DS3, STS1E, or other OLIU circuit packs Provides STS-1 signal cross-connections Adds SONET transport overhead Byte-interleaves and scrambles the three selected STS-1 signals to an STS-3 or STS-3c signal...
  • Page 264 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Maintenance Signal Functions The following are the major maintenance signal functions of the 21G/21G-U/ 21G2-U OLIU circuit pack: Inserts and detects STS-1 path AIS Inserts and detects SONET line AIS and inserts and detects line far-end- receive failure (FERF) Inserts STS-1 path unequipped signal Detects OC-3 line failures (LOS, LOF, AIS, and BER)
  • Page 265 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 23G/23G-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The 23G/23G-U OLIU circuit pack provides a 1310 nm long reach interface between an optical OC-12 line and 12 STS-1 electrical signals. 23G/23G-U OLIU Faceplate Indicators The 23G/23G-U OLIU circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7-26. The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack hardware failure or by loss of circuit pack +5 V, −5.2 V, +15 V, and/or −2.3 V DC.
  • Page 266 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The 23G/23G-U OLIU circuit pack provides an interface between an OC-12 optical line and 12 STS-1 signals. The 23G/23G-U OLIU provides 24 STS-1 input ports, 12 from service and 12 from protection TSI circuit packs. It selects up to 12 STS-1 inputs, performs pointer processing and frame alignment on each STS-1, inserts transport overhead, and combines and scrambles the 12 STS-1 signals into an STS-12 (622.08 Mb/s) signal.
  • Page 267 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation Transmission Circuitry Transmit Direction. Figure 7-27 is a functional block diagram of the 23G/23G-U OLIU. The 23G/23G-U OLIU receives an STS-1 rate clock and an associated frame pulse from each of the working and standby TSI circuit packs. The 23G/ 23G-U OLIU, under control of the SYSCTL, normally selects signals from the working TSI.
  • Page 268 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions The STS-1 signals are byte-interleaved and scrambled in a frame synchronous scrambler to produce a SONET format compatible STS-12 signal. The STS-12 signal is used to amplitude modulate a laser transmitter to convert the electrical signal to an NRZ-encoded SONET compatible OC-12 optical signal. Receive Direction.
  • Page 269 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Timing Circuitry Each TGS circuit pack sends timing signals to the 23G/23G-U OLIU circuit pack via the TSI circuit packs. The 23G/23G-U OLIU circuit pack sends a clock signal to both TGS circuit packs for loop timing. Protection Circuitry The 23G/23G-U OLIU provides STS-1 data path selectors for implementing a 1x1 protection switch between TSI circuit packs.
  • Page 270 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 23G/23G-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions The major transmit functions of the 23G/23G-U OLIU circuit pack are as follows: Selects 12 STS-1 signals from the TSI circuit packs Adds SONET transport overhead Byte-interleaves and scrambles the STS-1 signals to produce an STS-12 signal Modulates a laser transmitter to produce an OC-12 signal.
  • Page 271 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 23H/23H-U OLIU Circuit Pack Description Purpose of Circuit The 23H/23H-U OLIU circuit pack provides a 1550 nm long reach interface between an optical OC-12 line and 12 STS-1 electrical signals. 23H/23H-U OLIU Faceplate Indicators The 23H/23H-U OLIU circuit pack faceplate indicators are shown in Figure 7-28. The red FAULT LED lights on detection of circuit pack hardware failure or by loss of circuit pack +5 V, −5.2 V, +15 V, and/or −2.3 V DC.
  • Page 272 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions General Description of Operation The 23H/23H-U OLIU circuit pack provides an interface between an OC-12 optical line and 12 STS-1 signals and can be used in ring applications. The 23H/23H-U OLIU provides 24 STS-1 input ports, 12 from service and 12 from protection TSI circuit packs.
  • Page 273 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Detailed Description of Operation Transmission Circuitry Transmit Direction. Figure 7-29 is a functional block diagram of the 23H/23H-U OLIU. The 23H/23H-U OLIU receives an STS-1 rate clock and an associated frame pulse from each of the working and standby TSI circuit packs. The 23H/ 23H-U OLIU, under control of the SYSCTL, normally selects signals from the working TSI.
  • Page 274 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions The STS-1 signals are byte-interleaved and scrambled in a frame synchronous scrambler to produce a SONET format compatible STS-12 signal. The STS-12 signal is used to amplitude modulate a laser transmitter to convert the electrical signal to an NRZ-encoded SONET compatible OC-12 optical signal. Receive Direction.
  • Page 275 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions Timing Circuitry Each TGS circuit pack sends timing signals to the 23H/23H-U OLIU circuit pack via the TSI circuit packs. The 23H/23H-U OLIU circuit pack sends a clock signal to both TGS circuit packs for loop timing. Protection Circuitry The 23H/23H-U OLIU provides STS-1 data path selectors for implementing a 1x1 protection switch between TSI circuit packs.
  • Page 276 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 23H/23H-U OLIU Quick Reference Summary Transmit Functions The major transmit functions of the 23H/23H-U OLIU circuit pack are as follows: Selects 12 STS-1 signals from the TSI circuit packs Adds SONET transport overhead Byte-interleaves and scrambles the STS-1 signals to produce an STS-12 signal Modulates a laser transmitter to produce an OC-12 signal.

  • Page 277: Apparatus Blank

    363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 177B Apparatus Blank Description Purpose of Apparatus Blank The 177B apparatus blank (Figure 7-30) must be installed in all unused function unit slots to ensure adequate cooling by controlling air flow through the shelf. 177B S1:1 Lucent Figure 7-30.
  • Page 278 363-206-295 Circuit Pack Descriptions 177C Apparatus Blank Description Purpose of Apparatus Blank The 177C (Figure 7-31) must be installed in the main-a-1 and main-a-2 slots to ensure adequate cooling by controlling air flow through the shelf. 177C S1:1 Lucent Figure 7-31. 177C Apparatus Blank 7-77 Issue 1 December 1997...

  • Page 279: Administration And Provisioning

    Administration and Provisioning Table of Contents Overview Administration Version Recognition Security Software Upgrades Remote Software Download and Copy Software Compatibility Controller Maintenance Memory Administration System Backup and Restoral Service-Affecting Actions Multiplexing and Mapping DS3 to OC-12 OC-3 to OC-12 OC-3c to OC-12 (Optional Feature) EC-1 to OC-12 Provisioning Default Provisioning...
  • Page 280 Table of Contents Operations Interworking (OI) Provisioning 8-11 NSAP Provisioning 8-11 TARP Provisioning 8-12 Level 2 Provisioning 8-12 Port State Provisioning 8-13 Channel State Provisioning 8-13 Line State Provisioning 8-14 Remote OS Access (TL1/X.25 GNE) 8-14 Remote CIT Login 8-14 Remote Software Download and Copy 8-14 Subnetwork Size...
  • Page 281 Administration and Provisioning Overview This section describes the administration and provisioning features of the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. The following topics are described in addition to the administration and provisioning features: Multiplexing and mapping Cross-connection provisioning for ring networks Listing of provisionable parameters with their ranges and default values.

  • Page 282: Administration And Provisioning

    363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Security DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers provide security capabilities to protect against unauthorized access to the system through the CIT, data communications channel (DCC), and TL1/X.25 interfaces. When security is enabled (default is disabled for the CIT and DCC and always enabled for TL1/X.25), four types of users are...
  • Page 283 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning set-lgn — Set Login set-secu — Set Security set-sync — Set Synchronization characteristics. When security is enabled (default is “disable”), the following additional commands become restricted to privileged users only: apply — Locally Overwrite Executing Software cpy-prog —...
  • Page 284 DDM-2000 product family or SLC -2000 from the remote shelf (for example, a DDM-2000 OC-12 at the CO and a DDM- 2000 FiberReach at the RT site). Remote software download and copy is also supported in multi-vendor subnetworks, but only between DDM-2000 Multiplexers.
  • Page 285 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Controller Maintenance The controller for the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer consists of the SYSCTL and OHCTL circuit packs. The SYSCTL circuit pack provides CIT interfaces and coordinates protection switching, as well as all shelf maintenance and provisioning activities. The OHCTL circuit pack provides an X.25 interface and a communications channel to remote shelves via the DCC bytes in the OC-N section overhead.
  • Page 286 User Guide, for additional information. Service-Affecting Actions Although the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer is designed to minimize LOS due to equipment failure or human action, there are certain controller related actions that can cause a loss of provisioning data and possibly LOS. These actions include:...
  • Page 287 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Multiplexing and Mapping The following paragraphs describe DS3 to OC-12, OC-3 to OC-12, EC-1 to OC-12, and OC-3c to OC-12 (feature package option) multiplexing and mapping. DS3 to OC-12 Each DS3 signal received by a 3DS3 circuit pack is mapped to an STS-1 signal via the asynchronous mapping as specified in the SONET standard.
  • Page 288 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning OC-3c to OC-12 (Optional Feature) This application is a feature package option which must be enabled using the set-feat command. A function unit can be optionally equipped with 21-type OLIUs for OC-3c transport. The incoming OC-3c signal is electrically converted into an STS-3c signal.
  • Page 289 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Provisioning The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer allows the user to customize many system characteristics through its provisioning features. Provisioning parameters are set by a combination of on-board switches and software control. Parameters likely to vary from installation to installation (for example, DS3 LBOs) and parameters that will not change in service (for example, OC-3 optical power) are set with on-board switches.
  • Page 290 Feature Package Provisioning Certain software features are available only through a special licensing agreement with Lucent Technologies. The OC-3c (STS-3c) feature is enabled by privileged- user logins according to the licensing agreement, using the set-feat command and can be reviewed using the rtrv-feat command. This feature is optional and may not be active on all systems.

  • Page 291: Oi Software Compatibility

    Remote OS access (via TL1/X.25 GNE) Remote CIT login (remote technician access) Remote software download and copy See also 824-102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide . NSAP Provisioning The network services access point (NSAP) is a multiple part address that uniquely identifies each NE for OI purposes.
  • Page 292 In the unlikely event the TDC contains inaccurate information, the TDC parameters may be used to update the TDC. Eliminated Provisioning: Because DDM-2000 OC-12 Release 7.0 does not support Lucent Directory Services (LDS) or Remote NE Status features, the...
  • Page 293 AUTO state until a valid signal, a framed signal that is not alarm indication signal (AIS) or unequipped is received on that channel. While in AUTO state, no alarms or events are reported on the channel by the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. On receiving a valid signal, which occurs when the end-to-end circuit is completely provisioned, the channel automatically changes to the IS state, and normal alarm and event reporting starts.
  • Page 294 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Line State Provisioning Line state provisioning is a feature provided on DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers that suppresses alarm reporting and PM by supporting multiple states (IS and NMON) for OC-3 lines. See the set-state-oc3 and rtrv-state-oc3 commands.
  • Page 295 Administration and Provisioning Cross-Connection Provisioning Cross-Connection Types DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers have time slot interchange (TSI) features. This offers users flexibility in directing traffic in and out of these systems to support a wide variety and range of customer applications. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer can be provisioned for cross-connect routing of signals.
  • Page 296 Refer to Section 11, "Commands and Reports," for more information on these commands. DDM-2000 OC-12 rings provide flexible routing of STS-1 or STS-3c signals between high-speed and function unit interfaces. These "manual" cross- connections are entered using the CIT and are shown in Table 8-2 through Table 8-9.
  • Page 297 Table 8-2 throughTable 8-9 list the various types of supported cross-connections. Following the tables are descriptions of applications and the cross-connections each application requires. Table 8-2. DDM-2000 OC-12 Manual STS-1 Cross-Connections (Termination). From “To” CP Type Example Command * mb-{1-12} <-->...
  • Page 298 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-4. DDM-2000 OC-12 Manual STS-1 Cross-Connections (Rings Pass-Through) From “To” CP Type Example Command * mb-1 <--> mb-1 23-type OLIU ent-crs-sts1:mb-1,mb-1 mb-2 <--> mb-2 23-type OLIU ent-crs-sts1:mb-1,mb-2 mb-3 <--> mb-3 23-type OLIU ent-crs-sts1:mb-1,mb-3 mb-4 <-->...
  • Page 299 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-6. DDM-2000 OC-12 Manual STS-1 Cross-Connections (Rings Drop and Continue) From “To” CP Type Example Command * mb-{1-12} <--> a-{1-3} 3STS1E, 3DS3, OLIU ent-crs-sts1:mb-1,a-1:cct=dc,ring=mb1 mb-{1-12} <--> b-{1-3} 3STS1E, 3DS3, OLIU ent-crs-sts1:mb-2,b-3:cct=dc,ring=mb1 mb-{1-12} <--> c-{1-3} 3STS1E, 3DS3, OLIU ent-crs-sts1:mb-3,c-2:cct=dc,ring=mb2 mb-{1-12} <-->...
  • Page 300 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-9. DDM-2000 OC-12 Manual STS-3c Cross-Connections (COV) From “To” CP Type Example Command mb-{1,4,7,10} <--> {a,b,c,d}-1 23-type OLIU ent-crs-sts3c:a-1,mb-4:cct=cov Video/Broadband Applications For video cross-connections at COV and RTV sites, up to four incoming STS-3c signals from each 21-type OLIU in FN ()-1 and FN ()-2 slots are connected to ring 1 and ring 2 respectively in a one-way unprotected mode.
  • Page 301 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning OC-12 Ring Network Cross-Connection Example The following paragraphs describe a ring network example configuration and describe how to create manual cross-connections to establish the ring network. The example configuration is a ring network with two ring fibers and six nodes. Ring 1 carries ring traffic in the clockwise direction while Ring 2 carries ring traffic in the counterclockwise direction.
  • Page 302 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning It is important that the pass-through signal is assigned the same channel address for all nodes in the ring, including the add/drop nodes mb-1 in the example. Do the following procedure: Using the work order, identify the TIDs of the entry and exit points on the ring (Nodes 1 and 5 in the example).
  • Page 303 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Node 1 Node 2 MAIN-B-1 MAIN-B-2(P) MAIN-B-1 MAIN-B-2(P) Ring 1 m-12 m-12 m-12 m-12 Ring 2 m-12 m-12 m-12 m-12 3DS3 mb-1 to mb-1 pass through connection mb-1 to a-1 (ent-crs-sts1:mb-1,a-1) (ent-crs-sts1:mb-1,mb-1) where: mb-1 = address of STS-1 #1 in MAIN OLIU a-1 = address of DS3 port for 3DS3 circuit pack in FN A Node 5...
  • Page 304 Log in or remote log in to all the nodes and verify appropriate drop or pass- through ring cross-connections. Test both paths around the ring. Since DDM-2000 OC-12 uses non- revertive path switching to minimize the number of hits on services, the initial path selection is arbitrary.
  • Page 305 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Ring Drop and Continue Cross-Connection Provisioning All the information on "Ring Cross-Connection Provisioning" applies to "Ring Drop and Continue Cross-Connection Provisioning." Please review "Ring Cross- Connection Provisioning" as that information is not repeated here. Only the new provisioning information is presented here.
  • Page 306 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning In Figure 8-2 (one half of a drop and continue DRI application), CO 1 and CO 2 are drop and continue nodes. Traffic continued at CO 1 used Ring 2, which is the fiber connecting CO 1 to CO 2. Likewise, continued traffic at CO 2 used Ring 1, which is the fiber connecting CO 2 to CO 1.

  • Page 307: Drop And Continue Nodes

    363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning CO 4 MAIN-B-1 MAIN-B-2(P) OLIU OLIU Ring 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 mb-7 to c-2 (ent-crs-sts1:mb-7,c-2) where: mb-7 = address of STS-1 #7 in MAIN OLIU c-2 = address of DS3 port for 3DS3 circuit pack in FN C CO 2 CO 1...
  • Page 308 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning OC-12 Ring Network Drop and Continue Cross- Connection Example Figure 8-3 shows a DRI network. The user wants to provision a fully protected service using drop and continue cross-connections in this dual ring topology. The service is a DS3 at RT2 (bottom node in figure) to CO 4 (top node in figure).
  • Page 309 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning CO 4 MAIN-B-1 MAIN-B-2(P) OLIU OLIU Ring 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 mb-7 to c-2 (ent-crs-sts1:mb-7,c-2) where: mb-7 = address of STS-1 #7 in MAIN OLIU c-2 = address of DS3 port for 3DS3 circuit pack in FN C CO 2 CO 1...

  • Page 310: Single Homing

    The DDM-2000 OC-12 ring supports ring (0x1) OC-3/IS-3 interfaces in its function unit slots. These interfaces must be provisioned as ring (0x1). Signals pass through the DDM-2000 OC-12 transport ring and exit to the DDM-2000 OC-3 ring. OC-12 function unit slot fn(x)-1 is connected to OC-3 main-1 and OC-12 function unit slot fn(x)-2 is connected to OC-3 main-2.
  • Page 311 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Example Cross-Connections The OC-12 (STS level) cross-connections are: At CO: mb-1:a-3 mb-1 is dropped to the third STS in the OC-3 between CO and CO-1. At RT1: mb-1:a-1 mb-1 is dropped to the first STS in the OC-3 between RT1 and RT1-1. At RT2: mb-1:c-2 mb-1 is dropped to the second STS in the OC-3 between RT2 and RT2-2.
  • Page 312 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning The OC-3 (VT level) cross-connections are: At CO-1: a-1-4:m-3-2-1 The first VT in the second VTG is assigned between CO and CO-1. This slot will be used to transport the DS1 that will terminate on port a-1-4. At RT1-1: b-2-1:m-1-2-1 The above DS1 will leave the system from port b-2-1 at RT1-1.

  • Page 313: Example Single Homed Oc-3/Oc-12 Ring (0X1)

    363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning CO-1 RT1-1 OC-3 OC-3 MAIN 1 MAIN 1 OLIU a-1-4 OLIU b-2-1 MAIN 2 MAIN 2 OC-3 OC-3 OLIU OLIU a-1-4:m-3-2-1 m-1-2-1:b-2-1 mb-1:a-3 mb-1:a-1 MAIN MAIN MAIN MAIN OLIU OLIU OLIU OLIU Ring 1 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 2 OC-12...
  • Page 314 OC-12 function unit slot fn(A)-2 of Node 4 is connected to OC-3 main-2. Protection switching is not done on the DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf for these lines or paths on these lines. VT1.5 or STS-1 level path switching is done on the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer shelf.
  • Page 315 = address of STS#1 in MAIN B OLIU mb-1 = address of STS#1 in MAIN B OLIU a-1 = address of STS #1 in group A OLIU a-1 = address of STS #1 in group A OLIU DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring OC-12 Node 5 OC-12...
  • Page 316 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning For dual homed applications, OLIUs must be installed in the proper slots at the OC-12 nodes to support the traffic direction that is required. For example, in Figure 8-6, a 21-type OLIU must be installed in Node 6 function unit b-2 allowing DS1 traffic from Node 1 to be routed to Node 6 when the proper cross- connections are made.

  • Page 317: Example Dual Homed Oc-3/Oc-12 Ring (0X1) Cross-Connections With Intermediate Node

    363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring mb-1 to b-1 mb-1 to b-2 mb-1 to b-1 (ent-crs-sts1:mb-1,b-1) (ent-crs-sts1:mb-1,b-1) (ent-crs-sts1:mb-1,b-2) where: where: where: mb-1 = address of STS#1 in MAIN B OLIU mb-1 = address of STS#1 in MAIN B OLIU...

  • Page 318: Parameters Provisionable Via Hardware Switches

    363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Switch Selectable Parameters Table 8-10 describes the parameters provisionable via hardware switches. Refer to the command pages in Section 11, "Commands and Reports," for a complete explanation of parameters. Additional information on the shelf and other parameters is provided in the "Identifiers"...

  • Page 319: Parameters Provisionable Via The Cit

    363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) Selectable Parameters Table 8-11 describes the parameters provisionable via the CIT. Refer to the command pages in Section 11, "Commands and Reports" for a complete explanation of parameters. Additional information on the ID parameter is provided in the “Identifiers” part immediately following Table 8-11.
  • Page 320 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-11. Parameters Provisionable Via the CIT (Contd) Default Command Parameter Range (Note 1) (Note 2) STS-3c channel state AUTO, NMON AUTO † set-state-sts3c OC-12 degrade threshold — 10 set-oc12 AIS almn. level of NSA OC-12 line AIS CR, MJ, MN, NA set-oc12...
  • Page 321 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Table 8-11. Parameters Provisionable Via the CIT (Contd) Default Command Parameter Range (Note 1) (Note 2) L3org (Organization ID)* 000000 ent-ulsdcc-l3 L3res (Reserved)* Refer to command pages of 0000 ent-ulsdcc-l3 L3rd (Routing Domain)* ent-ulsdcc-l3 in “Section 11.” 0000 ent-ulsdcc-l3 L3area (Area within routing domain)*...
  • Page 322 363-206-295 Administration and Provisioning Notes Default means factory default (the CIT prompts display current provisioned values). To view the current values, precede these commands with •rtrv- instead of •set-. When security is enabled, this command is available to privileged users only (default is “disable”).
  • Page 323 Administration and Provisioning Identifiers (IDs) The following IDs are used for the shelf, target, CO/RT, NSAP address, and GNE. See also the Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide , 824-102-144 and the DDM-2000 Operations Systems Engineering Guide , 824-102-151.
  • Page 324 Maintenance Description Table of Contents Overview Three-Tiered Operations Single-Ended Maintenance Philosophy Multi-Vendor OI In-service (IS) Upgrades Software Upgrades DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Software Compatibility Maintenance Signaling 9-10 Fault Detection, Isolation, and Reporting 9-16 Detection 9-16 Isolation 9-16 Reporting 9-16 Protection Switching 9-17 Automatic Line Protection 9-17...
  • Page 325 Table of Contents Loopbacks 9-26 Tests 9-27 Transmission Tests 9-27 Operations Interface Tests 9-27 Performance Monitoring (PM) 9-27 DS3 Performance Monitoring (PM) 9-29 DS3 Path PM 9-29 DS3 Line Performance Monitoring 9-30 DS3 Performance Monitoring Parameters 9-30 Optical Parameters 9-33 Performance Monitoring (PM) Enabling 9-33 Laser Bias Current...
  • Page 326 Table of Contents Errored Seconds (ES) 9-37 Severely Errored Seconds (SES) 9-37 Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 9-37 DS3 Path Parameters 9-37 Performance Monitoring (PM) Enabling 9-37 CV-P Coding Violations 9-38 Severely Errored Frame Seconds (SEFS) 9-38 Errored Seconds (ES-P) 9-38 Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) 9-38 Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) 9-39...

  • Page 327: Three-Tiered Operations

    Overview This section defines the "maintenance philosophy" outlining the various features available to monitor and maintain the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. Specific trouble clearing and maintenance procedures are provided in the operation and maintenance (TOP) section of this manual (Volume II).

  • Page 328: Maintenance Description

    The SLC -2000 Access System supports the same X.25 and IAO LAN interfaces and TL1 message set as the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. The SLC -2000 Access System adds digital loop carrier (DLC) specific functionality to the existing TL1 messages (for example, for DLC related alarms) and in addition supports DLC specific TL1 commands (for example, DS0 level provisioning).

  • Page 329: Maintenance Description

    363-206-295 Maintenance Description TIER 3: Remote OS Access Remote Operations Center TL1/X.25, IAO LAN DDM-2000 TIER 2: Remote Maintenance TIER 1: and Provisioning User Panel LEDs and Pushbuttons RS-232 Alarm Surveillance Circuit Pack Fault and Active LEDs Performance Monitoring Automated Service Provisioning Remote Control Security...
  • Page 330 (CO) DDM-2000 associated with that DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer, as well as with other remote DDM-2000 Multiplexers in the same subnetwork. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer uses the SONET DCC to provide CIT remote access, remote software downloads, and OS remote access. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer uses the International Standards Organization (ISO) compliant open systems interconnection (OSI) protocol to communicate over the DCC.
  • Page 331 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Remote TL1/X.25 DDM-2000 Operation Center VF Line/Modem Multi-Span Single-Ended Operations DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 User Panel OC-12 Local and Remote Operations: Legend: SONET Alarm Status and Reports to OS Provisioning From OS enabled CIT Access From CO and OS (Via Data Network) tpa/789902/03 Figure 9-2.
  • Page 332 No DSNE is required for TARP. DDM-2000 OC-12 R7.0 has been developed to be compatible with any other- vendor NEs that also support TARP, OSI, IAO LAN, and TL1/X.25 as specified in Bellcore GR-253. In addition, DDM-2000’s TARP Manual Adjacency feature enables DDM-2000 to operate in networks that include CMISE-based NEs which may not support TARP propagation.
  • Page 333 Remote Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) login Remote software download and copy Remote NE-to-NE automatic time/date synchronization at start-up. For more information about DDM-2000 OC-12 R7.0 OI, refer to 824-102-144, Lucent Technologies 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operations Interworking Guide. Issue 1...

  • Page 334: Oc-12 In-Service Software Upgrade Compatibility

    5.0.n (Ring) 5.1/5.2 (Ring) 7.0 (Ring) Note: All DDM-2000 OC-12 shelves in a subnetwork should be using the same version of software. An "n" is the latest point release available. ∗ When doing an upgrade, it is recommended that the latest point release of software be used, if possible.

  • Page 335: Oc-3 And Oc-12 Software Compatibility

    † The 22-type OLIUs can only be used in the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf in place of the 21G/ 21G-U OLIU. The 22-type OLIUs cannot be used in the DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf. ‡ The 21D/21D-U OLIU can be used in the DDM-2000 OC-3 shelf in place of the 21G/ 21G-U OLIU for short-reach applications.
  • Page 336 DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer indicate the maintenance signals and failure conditions recognized by the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. The labels on the arrows pointing out of the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer indicate the signals generated by the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer in response to the indicated incoming signals or failure conditions.

  • Page 337: Example Of Main Signal As A Result Of Unprotected Incoming Oc-12 Failure

    363-206-295 Maintenance Description DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 System HUB RT Incoming OC-12 Failure DSX-3 - LOS fn-a Terminal - LOF 3DS3 - LINE AIS - LOP fn-b Main Main 3STS1E OLIU OLIU fn-c OLIU FT-2000, DACSIV-2000, DDM-2000 OC-3 fn-d Line...

  • Page 338: Maintenance Signaling - Path Switched Ring Applications

    363-206-295 Maintenance Description Line AIS STS-path AIS † STS-Path Yellow* Ring 1 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 Ring 2 FERF STS-Path Yellow* DS3 AIS* STS-LOP STS-path AIS STS-path AIS † STS-Path Yellow* Ring 1 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 Ring 2 STS-Path Yellow* DS3 AIS* FERF STS-Path Yellow STS-Path Yellow ‡...
  • Page 339 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Line AIS STS-path AIS† Ring 1 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 Ring 2 FERF EC-1 or OC-3/OC-3c STS-Path AIS* STS-LOP STS path AIS STS-path AIS† Ring 1 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 Ring 2 EC-1 or OC-3/OC-3c STS-Path AIS* FERF STS-Path Yellow‡ STS-Path Yellow Ring 1 DDM-2000...
  • Page 340 363-206-295 Maintenance Description STS-path AIS* Ring 1 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 Ring 2 STS-Path AIS* * The incoming DS3 failure causes insertion of STS path AIS only if the DS3 ring interface has been provisioned for dual ring interworking (DRI) Figure 9-4. Maintenance Signaling —...
  • Page 341 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Unequipped Unequipped † Ring 1 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 Ring 2 OC-3 STS-1 Unequipped Unequipped Ring 1 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 Ring 2 STS (RFI) Yellow* DS3 AIS* Unequipped Ring 1 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-12 Ring 2 EC-1, OC-N, or IS-N STS-1 AIS* * Signal is sent on STS-1 paths selected from the failed ring (ring 1) †...
  • Page 342 CIT and the TL1/X.25 interface. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer also stores a history of the past 500 alarm and status conditions and CIT events and reports them on demand through the CIT interface.
  • Page 343 Section 11, "Commands and Reports." Protection Switching The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer provides equipment protection switching of all transmission and synchronization circuit packs and uses SONET standard automatic protection switching for the OC-3 and OC-12 lines. Installation of protection switching equipment is optional.
  • Page 344 An APS is completed within 60 milliseconds of the beginning of a hard failure such as a fiber cut. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer APS is "span independent." In multispan applications, such as hubbing, an automatic or manual protection switch on one span does not cause a protection switch on any other span.

  • Page 345: Unidirectional Line Protection Switching

    363-206-295 Maintenance Description DDM-2000 A DDM-2000 C All four fibers are operational Both SERVICE fibers are "Active" Both PROTECTION fibers are "Standby" failure SERVICE fiber from A to C fails Location C detects failure failure Location C selects the PROTECTION fiber from A to C as "Active"...
  • Page 346 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Equipment Protection The 3DS3, 3STS1E, BCP3 TSI, and TG circuit packs are 1x1 protected and use nonrevertive switching. Green ACTIVE LEDs are provided on the faceplates of these circuit packs to indicate which circuit packs are active (carrying service). Synchronization Reference Protection In external timing and line-timing modes, the synchronization references are 1×1 protected.
  • Page 347 A node failure in a ring only affects traffic dropped at the failed node. The DDM-2000 OC-12 ring provides STS-1 path protection switching to support DS3, EC-1, and OC-3/IS-3 interfaces. The signal that enters the ring is protected on a SONET path basis as switching is performed independently for each path.
  • Page 348 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Path Protection Scheme Path protection rings feed a SONET payload (STS) from the ring entry point, simultaneously in both rotations of the ring, to the signal's ring exit point as shown by traffic AC and CA in Figure 9-7(a). This duplication of the signal that enters the ring is called a "head-end bridge."...
  • Page 349 363-206-295 Maintenance Description AC CA AC CA Node A Node A Node D Node B Node D Node B Node C Node C SWITCH MADE AC CA AC CA (a.) Normal Operation (b.) Path Failure Figure 9-7. Path Protection Switching 9-23 Issue 1 December 1997...
  • Page 350 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Dual Ring Interworking (DRI) Path Protection Scheme Interconnected rings or DRI is a topology that connects two rings together at two geographically separate nodes to provide an alternate route if a catastrophic failure occurs at one of the interconnecting nodes. See Section 2, "Applications," for more information on DRI.

  • Page 351: Dri Path Protection Switching

    363-206-295 Maintenance Description Two-Way Add/Drop Cross-Connection OC-3/OC-12 Two-Way Two-Way INTEROFFICE RING Pass Through Pass Through Cross-Connection Cross-Connection Serving Node Serving Node EC-1/OC-3/IS-3 Two-Way Two-Way Drop and Continue Drop and Continue Cross-Connection Cross-Connection Serving Node Serving Node Two-Way Two-Way OC-3 Pass Through Pass Through LOOP RING Cross-Connection...
  • Page 352 OLIU is currently being selected by a far-end NE. Loopbacks The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer allows technicians to do loopbacks on all low- speed DS3 and EC-1 interfaces. Low-speed DS3 and EC-1 electronic loopbacks, directed toward the high-speed OC-12, are individually controllable from the CIT.
  • Page 353 Refer to the test-trmsn-t3 command in Section 11, "Commands and Reports." Operations Interface Tests The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer also provides tests for LED indicators, office alarms, and the system controller. Refer to the test-led, test-alm, and test-sysctl commands in Section 11, "Commands and Reports."...

  • Page 354: Ds1/Ds3 Line And Path And Ds3 Path Performance Monitoring

    363-206-295 Maintenance Description Tariff verification refers to the process of collecting PM data on end-to-end path services (for example, DS1 and DS3). This data can be used to verify whether or not a customer is receiving the quality of service requested. Refer to Appendix A, "A SONET Overview,"...
  • Page 355 DS3 Performance Monitoring (PM) DS3 Path PM DDM-2000 OC-12 provides three DS3 path PM options using the BBG11B DS3 circuit pack: P-bit (parity bit), adjusted F&M bit, and C-bit. The options are selected using a command that also sets the PM mode to "on" (default) or "off", which enables or disables the monitoring and reporting of DS3 path PM data (see Table 9-4).
  • Page 356 10 , 10 , and DS3 Performance Monitoring Parameters Table 9-4 lists the performance parameters monitored by the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. The collection of performance parameters depends directly on slot state transitions, port states, and cross-connections. 9-30...

  • Page 357: Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Multiplexer Performance Monitoring Parameters

    363-206-295 Maintenance Description Table 9-4. DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Performance Monitoring Parameters Facility Measured Parameter Laser Bias Current ∗ OC-3 Optics Laser Transmit Power ∗ OC-12 Optics Laser Bias Current † OC-3 Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds (SEFS) OC-12 Section Severely Errored Frame Seconds (SEFS)
  • Page 358 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Table 9-4. Performance Monitoring Parameters (Cont) Facility Measured Parameter DS3 Path CV-P Coding Violations for P-Bit, Severely Errored Frame Seconds (SEFS) F&M Bit, and ES-P Errored Seconds C-Bit (From SES-P Severely Errored Seconds Fiber and DSX) UAS-P Unavailable Seconds DS3 Line Line Coding Violations (CVL) Errored Seconds (ESL)
  • Page 359 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Optical Parameters Performance Monitoring (PM) Enabling Collection of optical parameters are initiated when a slot is equipped with an OLIU circuit pack. Parameters continue to be available in reports and generate appropriate TCAs until the OLIU is removed and the update command or the UPD/INIT button is pressed.
  • Page 360 363-206-295 Maintenance Description OC-3 and OC-12 Line Parameters Performance Monitoring (PM) Enabling Collection of line parameters are initiated when a slot is equipped with an OLIU circuit pack. Parameters continue to be available in reports and generate appropriate TCAs until the OLIU is removed and the update command or the UPD/INIT button is pressed.
  • Page 361 363-206-295 Maintenance Description to 10 seconds of no SES or line signal failure. If there is an unprotected circuit pack failure, UAS are counted from within 1 second of circuit pack failure to within 1 second of circuit pack recovery. UAS are counted and thresholded independently for the service and protection lines.
  • Page 362 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Severely Errored Seconds (SES) A SES is a second in which 12 or more B2 parity violations are detected or one in which a LOS, LOF, or line AIS occurs. A UAS is not counted as a SES. SES are counted and thresholded for the EC-1 line.
  • Page 363 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Errored Seconds (ES) An "errored second" is a second in which one or more B3 parity violations are detected. Seconds that are UAS are not counted as ES. An ES "type A" is a second in which exactly one B3 parity violation is detected. An ES "type B" is a second in which more than one and less than nine B3 parity violations are detected.

  • Page 364: Ds3 Performance Monitoring Modes

    363-206-295 Maintenance Description Table 9-5. DS3 Performance Monitoring Modes DS3 Mode DS3 Port State IS (In Service) AUTO NMON (Not Monitored) CV-P Coding Violations CV-P coding violations are a count of the number of P-bit, adjusted F&M bit, or near-end and far-end C-bit parity errors in the DS3 signal received from the fiber and the DSX-3.

  • Page 365: Ds3 Performance Monitoring (Pm) Modes

    363-206-295 Maintenance Description Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) A UAS-P is a second during which the DS3 path is "unavailable." A DS3 path is considered "unavailable" from the beginning of X consecutive SES until the beginning of Y consecutive seconds, none of which is severely errored. An X is equal to 10 seconds or, in the case of a failure, the DS3 signal failure.
  • Page 366 8 hours and previous day registers also are provided. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer has the capability to initialize the current registers through the CIT locally or remotely at any time, as well as to report the contents of any register at any time.
  • Page 367 Section 11, "Commands and Reports." TCA Transmission to OS To trigger proactive maintenance activity at the OS, the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer TL1/X.25 interface is used. Threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) are reported to the OS via REPT EVT messages.
  • Page 368 363-206-295 Maintenance Description Reports This section provides information in reports available through the CIT. For reports available through the X.25 link, refer to 824-102-151, DDM-2000 Multiplexers Operations Systems Engineering Guide . Database Change Transmission to OS All provisioning changes are automatically reported to the OS over the TL1/X.25 interface.
  • Page 369 363-206-295 Maintenance Description State Reports The state reports list the states of all slots, channels, low-speed ports, and OC-3/ IS-3 lines on the system. The rtrv-state-eqpt report includes the protection switching state ("active" or "standby") and protection switching priority of all protected lines and equipment in the system.
  • Page 370 Technical Specifications Table of Contents Overview 10-1 DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer 10-1 External Transmission Interfaces 10-1 Electrical Interfaces 10-2 DS3 Low-Speed (BBG11/11B 3DS3) 10-2 EC-1 Low-Speed (BBG12 3STS1E) 10-5 Optical Interfaces 10-6 Lightguide Jumpers 10-6 Long Reach OC-3 Interface (21G/21G-U/ 21G2-U OLIU)
  • Page 371 10-35 Shelf Fuses 10-35 Power Dissipation 10-36 DDM-2000 OC-12 Reliability 10-38 Summary 10-38 Transmission Availability 10-38 Operation System Interface Availability 10-39 Optical Module Maintenance Objective 10-39 Infant Mortality 10-39 DDM-2000 OC-12 System Reliability Predictions 10-40 10-ii Issue 1 December 1997...

  • Page 372: Transmission Interface Standards

    Technical Specifications Overview This section contains the technical specifications for the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer External Transmission Interfaces The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer transmission interfaces adhere to industry standards as listed in Table 10-1. Table 10-1. Transmission Interface Standards...

  • Page 373: Technical Specifications

    363-206-295 Technical Specifications Electrical Interfaces The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer supports DS3 and EC-1 electrical low-speed interfaces. DS3 Low-Speed (BBG11/11B 3DS3) Electrical Specification The low-speed DS3 interface transmits/receives a standard electrical DS3 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993, Section 5 (44.736 Mb/s rate, DSX-3 interconnect specification, bipolar 3-zero substitution [B3ZS]...

  • Page 374: Technical Specifications

    363-206-295 Technical Specifications Table 10-2. DS3 Performance Monitoring (PM) Mode Monitor P-Bits Correct P-Bits VMR mode VM mode CC mode If provisioned in the VMR or VM modes (Table 10-2), DS3 P-bit violations and SEFS are counted and the count is thresholded to flag detected performance degradation of the DS3 signal incoming from the fiber.
  • Page 375 363-206-295 Technical Specifications — Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) A SES-P is a second in which 44 or more DS3 P-bit, adjusted F&M bit, or C-bit coding violations are detected. SES-P are not counted during UAS-P. SES-P are counted and thresholded independently for each DS3 path terminated by the system.
  • Page 376 363-206-295 Technical Specifications EC-1 Low-Speed (BBG12 3STS1E) Electrical Specification The EC-1 low-speed interface transmits and receives a standard electrical EC-1 signal as specified in ANSI T1.102-1993 (51.844 Mb/s rate, STSX-1 interconnect specification, B3ZS encoded and scrambled). Line buildout is provisionable as follows: —...
  • Page 377 21G-U/21G2-U OLIU is fully SONET compliant. The 21D/21D-U OLIU is a low- cost IS-3 low-speed interface used primarily to interconnect the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer to the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer at the same site. The nominal OC-3 and IS-3 line rates are 155.520 Mb/s.

  • Page 378: Optical System Interfaces (Points S And R)

    363-206-295 Technical Specifications Long Reach OC-3 Interface (21G/21G-U/ 21G2-U OLIU) Optical Specification The 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU photonics meet or exceed SONET specifications (TR 253, Iss. 2 - LR-1 MLM category). The multilongitudinal laser transmitter supplies an non return to zero (NRZ) coded signal. The PINFET receiver allows direct optical loopback without the use of an external attenuator, when the TRANSMIT POWER switch is on the low setting.
  • Page 379 363-206-295 Technical Specifications — Line AIS — B2 thresholding signal fail — B2 thresholding signal degrade. B2 signal degrade thresholds are user settable in the range from to 10 BER. Performance Monitoring (see Table 10-14) — Section severely errored frame seconds (SEFS) —...
  • Page 380 363-206-295 Technical Specifications Table 10-4 lists the 21G/21G-U/21G2-U and 21D/21D-U OLIU specifications. Table 10-4. 21G/21G-U/21G2-U and 21D/21D-U OLIU Specifications System Information: Terminal Equipment Identification 21G/21G-U/21G2-U OLIU 21D/21D-U OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 155.520 Mb/s 155.520 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Scrambled NRZ 1310 nm 1310 nm...
  • Page 381 363-206-295 Technical Specifications Table 10-5. 21G/21G-U and 21D/21D-U OLIU Link Budgets (Note 1) 21G/21G-U (Note 2) 21G2-U 21D/21D-U/ Parameter (Note 3) Tx High Tx Low 22D-U Minimum Wavelength (l 1280 nm 1280 nm 1280 nm 1270/1260* nm Tmin Maximum Wavelength (λ 1335 nm 1335 nm 1335 nm...
  • Page 382 363-206-295 Technical Specifications ‡ The minimum system gain for the DDM-2000 already takes into account aging, temperature, and manufacturing tolerances as these figures are built into the minimum transmitter power. The DDM-2000 system gain can, thus, not be directly compared with the DDM-1000 system gain because the DDM-1000 system gain does not include all of these effects.
  • Page 383 363-206-295 Technical Specifications Table 10-6. OC-3 OLIUs Link Budget — Multimode Operation Maximum Span Length (km) Fiber Bandwidth 21G/21G-U/21G2-U (Note 1) 21D/21D-U (Note 2) 1000 MHz-km 3.6/3.4 800 MHz-km 3.4/3.3 500 MHz-km 300 MHz-km Notes: Maximum 21G/21G-U/21G2-U MM Link Budget (dB) for multimode operation is 22.0 dB for high power and 15.6 dB for low power.
  • Page 384 Laser bias current is monitored on the 23G/23G-U OLIU. Long Reach 1550 nm OC-12 Interface (23H/23H-U OLIU) The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer supports a 1550 nm OC-12 long reach high- speed interface for controlled environments. The nominal OC-12 line rate is 622.08 Mb/s.
  • Page 385 363-206-295 Technical Specifications Table 10-7 lists the 23G/23G-U and 23H/23H-U OLIU specifications. Table 10-7. 23G/23G-U and 23H/23H-U OLIU Specifications System Information: Terminal Equipment Identification 23G/23G-U OLIU 23H/23H-U OLIU Optical Line Rate (Mb/s) 622.080 Mb/s 622.08 Mb/s Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ Scrambled NRZ Optical Wavelength 1310 nm...
  • Page 386 363-206-295 Technical Specifications Table 10-8. 23G/23G-U and 23H/23H-U OLIU Link Budgets (Note 1) Parameter 23G/23G-U (Note 2) 23H/23H-U (Note 3) Minimum Wavelength (λ 1298 nm 1530 nm Tmin Maximum Wavelength (λ 1325 nm 1570 nm Tmax Spectral Width* (δλ 2.0 nm <1.0 nm Maximum Transmitter Power†...
  • Page 387 363-206-295 Technical Specifications ¶ Optical path penalty includes effects of dispersion, reflection and jitter that occur on the optical path. The 23G/23G-U has 5.0 dB of total margin. Optical path penalty is normally 1.0 dB. This allows for a maximum dispersion of 92 psec/nm in the 1310 nm wavelength range.
  • Page 388 363-206-295 Technical Specifications OC-3 Optical Interface Mixing Mixing different OC-3 rate OLIUs at opposite ends of an optical link is often necessary for technical reasons or for convenience. The following information will aid in planning and engineering optical links having different types of OC-3 rate OLIUs at each end of the fiber.
  • Page 389 363-206-295 Technical Specifications NOTE: When using universal optical buildout attenuators for OLIUs equipped with Universal Optical Connectors (for example, 22G-U and 22D-U), the buildout must have the same type fiber on both sides, that is, single-mode to single- mode or multimode to multimode. The buildout must also match the mode of the fiber.
  • Page 390 363-206-295 Technical Specifications Table 10-10. OC-3 Rate OLIU Mixes — Maximum Link Budgets for SM Fiber (dB) Receiver 21D/21D-U/ 21D/21D-U/ 21G/ 22G-U∗/ 22D-U 22D-U Transmitter 21G-U 21G2-U 22G2-U (Ctrld. Env.) (Unctrld. Env.) 21G/21G-U 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 24.8 22.8 (high power) 21G/21G-U 18.6 18.6...
  • Page 391 363-206-295 Technical Specifications Table 10-11 details the maximum link budgets for each pairing of OC-3 rate OLIUs when operating on multimode (MM) fiber. These numbers give the maximum attenuation acceptable for proper operation of each transmitter/receiver pair. The link must have no more than this much attenuation either from fiber loss, splice loss, connector loss, external attenuators or a combination of these or the link will not operate properly.

  • Page 392: Universal Buildout Attenuators

    363-206-295 Technical Specifications Universal Optical Connector Attenuators The DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers provide Lucent's universal optical connector on all OLIUs. This connector is a two-part connector consisting of a faceplate-mounted block and an optical buildout. The faceplate block optionally supports an ST , SC, or FC-type optical buildout.
  • Page 393 363-206-295 Technical Specifications SONET Overhead Bytes The only use of SONET overhead bytes for proprietary signaling is the K2 byte for synchronization messaging. See Section 6, "System Planning and Engineering," of 363-206-200 DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers Applications, Planning, and Ordering Guide, for more information on synchronization messaging.
  • Page 394 363-206-295 Technical Specifications The DS1 timing output used for network synchronization (BBF2B only) provides long-term accuracy traceable to the OC-12 line. SONET synchronization messaging is used to output DS1 AIS when clock traceability is lost. Jitter on the DS1 output is less than 0.06 unit interval peak-to-peak. Synchronous Timing Generator 3 (BBF4) The TG3 Stratum 3 circuit pack meets the specifications of GR-253-CORE, SONET Transport Systems Generic Criteria.
  • Page 395 363-206-295 Technical Specifications The protection switching interrupt interval in response to an equipment failure is 60 milliseconds for all 1x1 protected circuit packs. The interrupt interval is measured at the DSn interface. Transient Performance Power Loss Restart After system shutdown due to power loss, the system will exhibit a 2-second error free transmission interval which begins within 1 minute of restoration of power.

  • Page 396: Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable Via The Cit

    363-206-295 Technical Specifications Table 10-14. Performance Monitoring Parameters Provisionable via the CIT Parameter Definition Threshold Range (Default) Command Current Current set- Facility Measure Quarter Hour pmthres- OC-12 Optics Laser Bias Current * enable/disable enable/disable sect OC-3 Optics Optical Transmit Power *(21G/21G-U only) -1 dB, -2 dB -1 dB, -2 dB sect...

  • Page 397: Cit Interface Pin Connection

    A CIT is recommended for installation, maintenance, and administrative activities. A PC is required for software download and to run CPro-2000 software. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer CIT port (mounted on the user panel) is a standard EIA-232-D (supersedes RS-232C specification) interface configured as DCE for direct connection to a CIT.
  • Page 398 (as well as the remote terminal shelves associated with that shelf in the bay). Any terminal compatible with the ANSI 3.64 standard should be compatible with the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer.
  • Page 399 363-206-295 Technical Specifications Compatible Modems A compatible modem must meet the following minimum requirements: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 baud Full duplex 8 data bits No parity bits 1 start bit 1 stop bit No flow control. The following stand-alone modems meet the modem requirements and can be used ®...
  • Page 400 The CPro-2000 Graphical User Interface (GUI) and Provisioning Tool is a Microsoft Windows based user interface that can optionally be used with the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. The tool simplifies and mechanizes administration, maintenance, and provisioning operations. CPro-2000 supports DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexers, DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers, and FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave Systems.
  • Page 401 Environmental Alarms and Controls The user-definable miscellaneous discrete environmental alarm and control interface allows the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers to monitor and control equipment at the local site. Twenty-one alarm or status environmental inputs can monitor environmental conditions (for example, open door, high temperature);...

  • Page 402: Tl1/X.25 Interface - Vc Assignments

    DDM-2000 (and FT-2000) NEs and alarm surveillance and provisioning operations systems (OS) such as Bellcore's NMA and OPS/INE OSs. The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer TL1/X.25 interface is based on Bellcore TR-TSY-000833, Issue 5. The DDM-2000 supports up to nine X.25 permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) and up to nine switched virtual circuits (SVCs) assigned by default as shown in Table 10-16.

  • Page 403: Tl1/X.25 Interface - Eia-232-D Pin Connections

    363-206-295 Technical Specifications At the packet layer, DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers are configured as a passive DTE with the following parameters as shown in Table 10-17. Table 10-17. TL1/X.25 Interface — X.25 Packet Layer Parameters Parameter Value Packet Size 128 bytes or 256 bytes...
  • Page 404 DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexers can be mounted in ED-8C500, ED-8C501 and ED-8C800, ED-8C801 (seismic) network bay frames. A maximum of three DDM-2000 OC-12 shelves may be mounted in a 7-foot bay. One OC-12 shelf and four OC-3 shelves can be mounted in a 7-foot bay. In addition to bay mounting, DDM-2000 OC-12 can be packaged with other equipment in 80A, 80D, and 80E cabinets, controlled environment vaults (CEVs), or huts.
  • Page 405 0°C to +49°C and humidity of 5 to 95 percent (noncondensing). EMC Requirements The DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
  • Page 406 Power Requirements Shelf Fuses The two −48 V feeders (A and B) are required for each DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf. Shelf power is protected by 10-amp fuses provided with the shelf. It is recommended that a supply of spare fuses be provided at DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer locations.

  • Page 407: Power Dissipation And Current Drains

    Technical Specifications Power Dissipation The power dissipation figures in Table 10-20 represent fully loaded shelves. DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf accommodates two −48 V power feeders ("A" and "B" office power feeders). Table 10-20 lists the List 1 and List 2 power drain.
  • Page 408 The following items should be noted: Loss of one power feeder does not cause a loss of service. All supply voltages other than −48 V required by the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer are generated by DC-to-DC converters within the DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf.
  • Page 409 1-second interval with a bit error rate of 10 or worse. The predicted hardware outages for various configurations of the DDM-2000 OC-12 system are given in Table 10-21. A Markov model was used to calculate the predicted system outage. The model assumes a mean time to repair of 2 hours for the CO environment and 4 hours for the RT environment.
  • Page 410 Therefore, the objective applies to the TL1/X.25 interface. This objective applies to circuitry needed to maintain communication from the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer to the central office's OS. Since the OS interface is used in the central office, the reliability model assumes the mean time to repair is 2 hours and the environmental factor is 1.0.

  • Page 411: Oc-12 System Reliability Prediction

    16.9 Example: The unavailability of one two-way DS3 channel within one DDM-2000 OC-12 system configured to multiplex DS3 to OC-12, located in an uncontrolled environment, is 0.499 minutes per year (that is, fraction of time per year when the DS3 channel is unavailable). The mean time between outage of the DS3 channel is 483 years (that is, average length of time until a DS3 outage occurs).
  • Page 412 363-206-295 Technical Specifications Table 10-22. DDM-2000 OC-12 Circuit Pack Reliability (Note 1) Circuit Pack FITS (Note 2) MTBF (Years) FITS (Note 2) MTBF (Years) BBF2B (TGS) 2311 49.40 3467 32.93 BBF4 (TG3) BBG8 (SYSCTL) 12806 8.91 19208 5.94 BCP3 (TSI) 2692 42.41...
  • Page 413 Commands Reports Contents Overview 11-1 Command Page Format 11-1 Input Format 11-2 Addresses 11-3 Command Prompt Mode 11-6 Special Control Characters 11-7 Paged Reports 11-7 Confirmation Requests 11-8 Output Descriptions 11-8 Alarm Level Prompt 11-8 Security 11-8 Command Menu 11-10 Starting Session 11-16...
  • Page 414 Contents INIT-SYS Initialize System 11-75 INS-PROG Install Program 11-82 LOGOUT Logout 11-90 OPR-ACO Operate Alarm Cutoff 11-91 OPR-LPBK-EC1 Operate Loopback EC-1 11-92 OPR-LPBK-T3 Operate Loopback 11-94 RESET Reset 11-98 RLGN Remote Login 11-100 RLS-LPBK-EC1 Release Loopback EC-1 11-104 RLS-LPBK-T3 Release Loopback 11-105 RSTR-PASSWD...
  • Page 415 Contents RTRV-STATE-STS1 Retrieve State STS-1 11-193 RTRV-STATE-STS3c Retrieve State STS-3c 11-195 RTRV-STS1 Retrieve STS-1 11-197 RTRV-STS3c Retrieve STS-3c 11-200 RTRV-SYNC Retrieve Synchronization 11-202 RTRV-T3 Retrieve 11-212 RTRV-TL1MSGMAP Retrieve Message 11-216 RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Retrieve Path Trace STS1 11-219 RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 Retrieve Upper Layer Section DCC, Layer...
  • Page 416 Contents SWITCH-SYNC Protection Switch Synchronization 11-334 TEST-ALM Test Office Alarm 11-338 TEST-LED Test Indicators 11-340 TEST-SYSCTL Test System Controllers 11-341 TEST-TRMSN-T3 Test Transmission 11-343 TOGGLE (Ctl-T) Toggle 11-348 Update 11-350 Detailed Alarm History Reports Introduction 11-355 RTRV-ALM 11-356 RTRV-HSTY 11-373 11-iv Issue December...
  • Page 417 This chapter describes the command and report features of the American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) terminal interface to a DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. It provides detailed information about each command, as well as system report outputs and explanations. Reason for Issue This chapter provides the details of software commands for OC-3 Release 7.0.
  • Page 418 363-206-295 Commands and Reports — The DESCRIPTION part provides detailed information about each command. — The RELATED COMMANDS part identifies commands that affect or are affected by the named command or sets the conditions displayed by a report. Some commands are not affected by any other command and will not have this part included on the command page.
  • Page 419 363-206-295 Commands and Reports Addresses Table 11-1 specifies the valid addresses for slots, lines, ports, channels, paths, cross-connections, and operations interfaces. Where lists of items appear in braces { }, and one (and only one) of these items may be used to form the address.
  • Page 420 363-206-295 Commands and Reports Table 11-1. DDM-2000 OC-12 Address Table Object Entity Address Example Entire System Main slot main-{a,b,all*}-{1,2,all} main-all TSI unit slot tsi-{1,2,all} tsi-1 Slots Function unit slot fn-{a,b,c,d,all*}-{1,2,all} fn-all fn-b-all fn-d-1 Timing slot tg-{1,2,all} tg-all Sys. control slot...
  • Page 421 363-206-295 Commands and Reports Table 11-1. DDM-2000 OC-12 Address Table Object Entity Address Example User Panel userpanel userpanel cit-{1,2,all} cit1 Section Data dcc-{mb,a,b,c,d,all*}{1,2} (Rings, fecom only) dcc-mb2 Comm Channel dcc-all (Rings security, R5.0 and later) dcc-all Operation TBOS tbos-1 tbos-1 Interfaces X.25 link...
  • Page 422 DDM-2000 reports. The following list shows standard abbreviations for the various members of the 2000 family. Complete Product Name Abbreviated Product Name unknown unknown* DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-OC3 DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-OC12 DACS IV-2000 DACS-IV FT-2000 FT-2000 SLC-2000 Access System SLC-2000...
  • Page 423 363-206-295 Commands and Reports To reenter the command mode from the prompt mode, answer the current prompt, then continue entering input on the same line after typing a comma (,). When the input is completed, terminating the command with a semicolon (;) will return the session to the command mode.
  • Page 424 363-206-295 Commands and Reports Confirmation Requests NOTE: Some commands can be service-affecting if their default parameters are ignored. After all parameters have been entered, a caution message followed by the command name, the selected values of parameters, and the prompt “Execute? (y/n or CANcel/DELete to quit)= is printed.
  • Page 425 363-206-295 Commands and Reports The following comands are always restricted to privileged users only: — init-sys (initialize system) — rstr-passwd (restore password) — rtrv-lgn (retrieve login) — rtrv-passwd (retrieve password) — set-fecom (set far-end communication) — set-lgn (set login) — set-secu (set security) —...

  • Page 426: Ddm-2000 Oc-12 Command Menu

    363-206-295 Commands and Reports DDM-2000 OC-12 Command Menu Table 11-2 lists the DDM-2000 OC-12 commands by category and indicates what type of user is able to execute each command. Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-12 Command Menu Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level...
  • Page 427 363-206-295 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-12 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only map-neighbor Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only map-network Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only osacmap Privileged, General, Maintenance, Reports only...
  • Page 428 363-206-295 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-12 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level set- Privileged only if Security enabled. Privileged, General if Security disabled. state-t3 Privileged, General state-ec1 Privileged, General state-oc3 Privileged, General state-sts1 Privileged, General...
  • Page 429 363-206-295 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-12 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level ins- prog Privileged only if Security enabled. Privileged, General if Security disabled. CONFIGURATION ent- crs-sts1 Privileged, General (Continued) crs-sts3c Privileged, General usldcc-l3 Privileged only if Security enabled.
  • Page 430 363-206-295 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-12 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level rtrv- pm-tca Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only pm-sect Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only pm-line Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only pm-t3 Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only pm-sts1 Privileged, General, Mainenance,...
  • Page 431 363-206-295 Commands and Reports Table 11-2. DDM-2000 OC-12 Command Menu (Contd) Command Category Verb Modifier Security Level rtrv- Privileged secu Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. SECURITY passwd Privileged set- Privileged secu Privileged passwd Privileged, General, Mainenance, Reports-Only. rstr- passwd Privileged apply...
  • Page 432 “Connect a CIT and Establish a Session” with the DDM-2000. CPro-2000 CPro-2000 is a software package from Lucent Technologies to help users of DDM-2000 Multiplexer systems set up and use an advanced, yet simple, craft operations environment on a personal computer using Microsoft* Windows* 3.1 in the enhanced mode.
  • Page 433 NAME DUMMY PAGE: INPUT FORMAT Dummy page DESCRIPTION This page formatting purposes only. REMOVE THIS PAGE! Issue December 1997 11-2 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 434 APPLY Page APPLY NAME apply: Locally Overwrite Executing Software Generic with Software Generic INPUT FORMAT apply[:[date= date ][,[time= time ][,action= action ]]]; DESCRIPTION This command issued user initiate installation dormant copy software generic stored network element’s flash memory; therefore replacing currently executing software...
  • Page 435 APPLY Page APPLY input parameters are: Date entered digits YYMMDD, where represents last date digits year, month, day. Default current system day. parameter entered, date value entered action install NULL value already passed 24-hour interval current time system’s date, will default next system’s...
  • Page 436 APPLY Page APPLY CAUTION: this command scheduled execution action =install), the set-date command should never issued before program installation invoked completed. this case, user advised wait until program installation completed, system reset. NOTE: this command issued with action =install while there outstanding apply...
  • Page 437 APPLY Page APPLY command issued schedule (install NULL) software apply installation entered with invalid syntax, user will reprompted time enter valid time value. command issued schedule (install NULL) software apply installation entered with invalid syntax, user will reprompted date enter valie date value.
  • Page 438 APPLY Page APPLY otherwise valid command with action equal initiated, with cancel outstanding apply command, request will denied following message displayed: After testing program apply, following confirmation message will displayed: Issue December 1997 11-21 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 439 APPLY Page APPLY When this command used install release program that significantly different from program currently running system, following confirmation message will displayed after testing program apply: "Install Generic Program" section (Volume this manual complete instructions before using this command. command obtain exact...
  • Page 440 APPLY Page APPLY program apply fails, following failure message will displayed: ’ this command issued with action equal following cancel confirmation message will displayed: NOTE: When value entered Action, user will cancel prompted (date time) parameters. soon scheduled program installation canceled result this...
  • Page 441 APPLY Page APPLY When user gives positive response confirmation message, following message displayed: Once program installation canceled, following message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS cpy-prog ins-prog rtrv-ne Issue December 1997 11-24 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 442 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG NAME cpy-prog: Copy Program INPUT FORMAT cpy-prog: TID; DESCRIPTION This command used copy software program from DDM-2000 network element another. software copied non-executing, dormant copy software generic. When executing this command, local network element will internally check whether currently executing...
  • Page 443 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG system name specified name local system instead remote system, following error message will displayed user will asked reenter TID: user attempts copy program from product type different product type (for example, DDM-2000 OC-12 program into FT-2000 system), following denial message...
  • Page 444 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG Network Element (NE) receives this command, unable determine TID-NSAP translation entered (TID could found), this command will denied following message displayed: remote NE’s does match entered (only NSAP matched this case), this command will denied following message displayed receives this...
  • Page 445 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG dormant copy either corrupted found, only software generic that copied, following denial message displayed: user should attempt copy program from OC-12 shelf using Release later release capable receiving, storing, sending compressed files) into remote OC-12 shelf using Release earlier release...
  • Page 446 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG following confirmation message will displayed when this command entered: When this command used copy release program (into dormant memory remote system) that significantly different from program currently running system, following confirmation message will displayed after testing program copy: Issue December...
  • Page 447 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG "Install Generic Program" section this manual complete instructions before using this command. command obtain exact target system. rtrv-map-network current program version also obtained from initial screen when logged into system with craft interface terminal (CIT). When user gives positive response...
  • Page 448 CPY-PROG Page CPY-PROG RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-map-network rtrv-ne ins-prog Issue December 1997 11-31 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 449 DLT-CRS-STS1 Page DLT-CRS-STS1 NAME dlt-crs-sts1: Delete Cross-Connection STS-1 INPUT FORMAT dlt-crs-sts1: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command deletes STS-1 cross-connections. This command available with OC-12 ring releases. input parameters are: Address1 and Address2 These addresses STS-1...
  • Page 450 DLT-CRS-STS1 Page DLT-CRS-STS1 Address1 , Address2 and must match existing STS-1 cross- CrsType connection execution command will complete with following message: attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: Users delete STS-1 pass-through cross-connect...
  • Page 451 DLT-CRS-STS1 Page DLT-CRS-STS1 After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS ent-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-sts1 Issue December 1997 11-34 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 452 DLT-CRS-STS3c Page DLT-CRS-STS3c NAME dlt-crs-sts3c: Delete Cross-Connection STS-3c INPUT FORMAT dlt-crs-sts3c: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command deletes STS-3c cross-connections. STS-3c signals identified first STS-1 address STS-3c signal. following chart shows mapping STS-3c addresses...
  • Page 453 DLT-CRS-STS3c Page DLT-CRS-STS3c CrsType specifies whether cross-connection two-way drop continue, video applications sites. valid values are: Two-way applies add/drop pass through cross- twoway connections. This default value. Drop continue connections support dual ring applications. Video cross-connections site. Video cross-connections sites. The cct parameter optional...
  • Page 454 DLT-CRS-STS3c Page DLT-CRS-STS3c After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS ent-crs-sts3c rtrv-crs-sts3c Issue December 1997 11-37 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 455 DLT-OSACMAP Page DLT-OSACMAP NAME dlt-osacmap: delete application context entry INPUT FORMAT dlt-osacmap:vc= VCType ,snpa= SNPA ; DESCRIPTION This command deletes data terminal equipment (DTE) calling addresses operations systems (OS) that assigned switched virtual circuit (SVC) and/or permanent virtual circuit (PVC) X.25 subnetwork application...
  • Page 456 DLT-OSACMAP Page DLT-OSACMAP vc or snpa entered known command will denied with following message: When this command entered active GNE, following confirmation message will displayed: ’ When this command entered network element that active GNE, following confirmation message will displayed: Issue December 1997...
  • Page 457 DLT-OSACMAP Page DLT-OSACMAP RELATED COMMANDS ent-tl1msgmap rtrv-tl1msgmap ent-osacmap rtrv-osacmap Issue December 1997 11-40 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 458 DLT-ULSDCC-L4 Page DLT-ULSDCC-L4 NAME dlt-ulsdcc-l4: Delete Upper Layer Section INPUT FORMAT dlt-ulsdcc-l4:[L4ajsys= AJSystemId ][L4tdctid= TDCTID ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality dlt-ulsdcc-l4 command OC-12 Release later TARP releases. This command used delete provisionable parameters Layers through open systems interconnection (OSI) 7-layer...
  • Page 459 DLT-ULSDCC-L4 Page DLT-ULSDCC-L4 parameter used specify entry TARP L4tdctid Data Cache (TDC) delete. Specifying this parameter causes deletion single data TDC. Multiple rows data deleted using multiple occurrences this command. stores three parameters each entry; NSAP, address type. address type user provisionable default...
  • Page 460 DLT-ULSDCC-L4 Page DLT-ULSDCC-L4 After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: entry does match Target Identifier (TID) specified then action taken following denial message L4tdctid displayed: RELATED COMMANDS ent-ulsdcc-l4 ent-ulsdcc-l3 rtrv-ulsdcc-l4 Issue December 1997 11-43 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 461 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 NAME ent-crs-sts1: Enter Cross-Connection STS-1 INPUT FORMAT ent-crs-sts1: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType][, ring= RingId]; DESCRIPTION This command sets bidirectional STS-1 cross-connections between Main function unit slots OC-12 ring applications. input parameters are: Address1 and Address2 These addresses STS-1...
  • Page 462 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 This parameter available with ring releases. RingId ring ring identification drop continue connections. For dc type connections, specifies which ring rotation will continued well dropped this network element. valid values are: Ring mb1 defined ring that received Main-b-1 OLIU transmitted...
  • Page 463 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 cross-connection request includes invalid circuit pack type, invalid port address, specifies cross-connection supported system, following denial message will displayed: cross-connection request STS1E low-speed interface, EC-1 port state NMON following denial message will cannot displayed: following denial message will displayed both...
  • Page 464 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 this command issued while low-speed address function unit where parameter command) application set-oc3 following denial message will displayed: video addresses indicate pass-through cross-connection CrsType not twoway request denied with following message: attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs...
  • Page 465 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed. The RingId parameter displayed confirmation message only parameter CrsType this command issued drop continue type cross-connection low-speed address function unit equipped with 3DS3 circuit pack, following caution message will added confirmation message:...
  • Page 466 ENT-CRS-STS1 Page ENT-CRS-STS1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-sts1 Issue December 1997 11-49 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 467 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c NAME ent-crs-sts3c: Enter Cross-Connection STS-3c INPUT FORMAT ent-crs-sts3c: Address1 , Address2 [: cct= CrsType][, ring= RingId]; DESCRIPTION This command sets both bidirectional unidirectional STS-3c cross- connections between main-b slots function unit slots. between main-b-1 main-b-2 OLIU circuit packs.
  • Page 468 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c input parameters are: Address1 and Address2 These addresses STS-3c channels that cross-connected. OC-12 ring releases, cross-connect mode automatically manual cannot changed. crs= manual Valid manual cross-connections listed below. Where items appear braces (and only one) these items used form address.
  • Page 469 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c this command invoked using addresses where active STS-3c cross- connections active STS-1 cross-connections within STS-3c address already exist, following denial message will displayed: cross-connection request includes invalid circuit pack type, invalid address, specifies cross-connection supported system, following denial message will...
  • Page 470 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c following denial message will displayed cross-connection request made before enabling STS-3c feature through set-feat command: following denial message will displayed cross-connection request made with cov or rtv options parameter when application parameter command video option: set-oc3 attempt made execute this...
  • Page 471 ENT-CRS-STS3c Page ENT-CRS-STS3c After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed. The RingId parameter displayed confirmation message only parameter CrsType RELATED COMMANDS set-feat rtrv-feat set-oc3 rtrv-oc3 dlt-crs-sts3c rtrv-crs-sts3c rtrv-crs-sts1 Issue December 1997 11-54 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 472 ENT-OSACMAP Page ENT-OSACMAP NAME ent-osacmap: enter application context INPUT FORMAT ent-osacmap:vc= VCType ,snpa= SNPA ,acid= ACID ; DESCRIPTION This command creates entries X.25 subnetwork application context map. This lists permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) switched virtual circuit (SVC) available X.25 channel maps them operation...
  • Page 473 ENT-OSACMAP Page ENT-OSACMAP tl1Maintenance (Assigned "2" default value) tl1MemoryAdministration (Assigned "3" default value) NOTE: values tl1CR , tl1Other1 , tl1Test and provided additional ACID values tl1Other2 application that supported DDM- 2000. Note that will never report autonomous tl1CR messages. user attempts enter additional...
  • Page 474 ENT-OSACMAP Page ENT-OSACMAP When this command entered network element that active GNE, following confirmation message will displayed: NOTE: same ACID appear more than once table. RELATED COMMANDS ent-tl1msgmap rtrv-tl1msgmap dlt-osacmap rtrv-osacmap Issue December 1997 11-57 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 475 ENT-TL1MSGMAP Page ENT-TL1MSGMAP NAME ent-tl1msgmap: Enter Message Operation Systems INPUT FORMAT ent-tl1msgmap:acid= ACID ,msgtype= MessageType ,action= Action ; DESCRIPTION NOTE: security enabled port shelf, then this command available privileged users only ports shelf. This command maps DDM-2000 message types operations systems (OS) this...
  • Page 476 ENT-TL1MSGMAP Page ENT-TL1MSGMAP input parameters are: Application Context (ACID) string alphanumeric ACID characters, which function. valid ACID values are: tl1Maintenance (This identifies type). maintenance tl1MemoryAdministration (This identifies type). memory~administration (This identifies type). tl1Test testing tl1PeerComm (This identifies type peer communications. This ACID also...
  • Page 477 ENT-TL1MSGMAP Page ENT-TL1MSGMAP Action either enabled or disabled associates action MessageType When this command entered, following confirmation message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-tl1msgmap Issue December 1997 11-60 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 478 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 NAME ent-ulsdcc-l3: Enter Upper Layer Section Layer INPUT FORMAT ent-ulsdcc-l3:[L3org= OrganizationId ][,L3res= Reserved ][,L3rd= RoutingDomain ] [,L3rarea= RoutingArea [, ] L3lv2is= Level2Router ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality ent-ulsdcc-l3 command OC-12 Release later TARP releases. CAUTION: Errors provisioning...
  • Page 479 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 NOTE: security enabled, then this command available privileged users only ports shelf. structure NSAP shown following display. field names shown first row, size bytes) each field listed second row. NSAP Structure NSAP Organization Area System Field: Identifier Bytes: Default 000000...
  • Page 480 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 additional information provisioning, refer 824-102-144, 2000 Product Family Multi-Vendor Operation Interworking Guide input parameters are: Organization 6-digit hexadecimal field used provision into L3org NSAP address allocated company code assigned *-administered Registration Authority Organization ANSI Names. original value this parameter 000000.
  • Page 481 ENT-ULSDCC-L3 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L3 After entering this command following confirmation message displayed: NOTE: This command executes immediately upon entering however changes refected report rtrv-map-neighbor minutes after this command executed. user enters same parameter values currently defined "L3" parameters, system does reset. RELATED COMMANDS dlt-ulsdcc-l4...
  • Page 482 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 NAME ent-ulsdcc-l4: Enter Upper Layer Section Layer INPUT FORMAT ent-ulsdcc-l4:[L4tlif= LifeTime ][[[,L4ajsys= AJSystemId ] [[,L4ajorg= AJOrganizationId [, ] L4ajres= AJReserved ] [,L4ajrd= AJRoutingDomain ][,L4ajarea= AJRoutingArea ]]]] [[,L4t1tm= TimerT1 ][,L4t2tm= TimerT2 [, ] L4t3tm= TimerT3 ] [,L4t4tm= TimerT4 ][,L4lftm= LDBFlushTimer ]] [[,L4etdc= L4etdc ][[,L4tdcsys= L4tdcSystemId ][[, L4tdctid L4tdctid ] [,L4tdcorg= L4tdcOrganizationId ][,L4tdcres= L4tdcReserved ]...
  • Page 483 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 this command page. Multiple TARP Manual Adjacent values entered using multiple occurrences this command. Layer parameters that provisioned using this command, that needed operation have original values. Hence, necessary provision these parameters operate properly network. NOTE maximum Manual Adjacencies initiated...
  • Page 484 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Each programmed with unique System Identifier factory. This byte digit) field NSAP guarantees that NSAP each unique. Select (SEL) field currently user provisionable normally default value "0". purpose differentiate between multiple NSAP addresses associated with same system. value fixed according...
  • Page 485 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 NSAP Reserved field local This parameter used provision NSAP Routing Domain field L4ajrd TARP adjacent This byte (4-digit hex) field TARP adjacent default value this parameter value NSAP Routing Domain field local This parameter used provision NSAP Area field TARP...
  • Page 486 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 must also specified entry made L4tdctid TARP Data Cache. This byte digit) field manually entered into TARP Data Cache. There default value this parameter. NOTE: NSAP System field, which L4tdcsys unique each only parameter that required enter TARP data cache...
  • Page 487 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 This parameter used provision NSAP’s L4tdcorg Organization field that manually entered into TDC. specifies allocated Network Services Provider Code assigned ANSI- administered Registration Authority Organization Names. default value this parameter NSAP’s Organization field local This parameter used provision NSAP Reserved...
  • Page 488 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 invalid value entered (that value equal less than L4tlif value greater than 65535), following message displayed user reprompted: invalid L4t1tm , L4t2tm , L4t3tm , L4t4tm or L4lftm value entered (for example, value equal less than following message displayed user...
  • Page 489 ENT-ULSDCC-L4 Page ENT-ULSDCC-L4 After entering this command following confirmation message displayed: user changes value "L4" parameter enters same parameter values currently defined "L3" parameters, system does reset. RELATED COMMANDS ent-ulsdcc-l3 rtrv-ulsdcc-l3 rtr-vulsdcc-l4 dlt-ulsdcc-l4 Issue December 1997 11-72 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 490 HELP Page HELP NAME help: Provide In-context Help INPUT FORMAT DESCRIPTION Help ? provides help within craft dialog CIT. Help provided automatically when invalid input entered also requested time typing " ". " " displays help message then displays another prompt.
  • Page 491 INIT-PM Page INIT-PM NAME init-pm: Initialize Performance Monitoring (PM) INPUT FORMAT init-pm:reg= Register ; DESCRIPTION This command initializes current and/or current quarter-hour performance-monitoring storage registers. Registers previous previous quarter-hours affected. NOTE: security enabled port shelf, then this command available privileged users only ports...
  • Page 492 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS NAME init-sys: Initialize System INPUT FORMAT init-sys: Address ; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. command should used in-service system. This init-sys:all command should only used installation before system turnup. This command initializes provisionable parameters their default values.
  • Page 493 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS NOTE: Parameters provisioned using following commands listed below parameters. Alarm delays set-attr-alm NSAP Starting with OC-12 Release later TARP releases, following additional parameters will affected well: L4ajorg, L4ajres, L4ajrd, L4ajarea, L4ajsys L3lv2is L4tlif L4t1tm, L4t2tm, L4t3tm, L4t4tm, L4lftm L4etdc ent-ulsdcc-l3...
  • Page 494 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS STS-1 Trace Value set-trace-sts1 Idle value, Alarm Group AGNE set-ne OC-12 Release later TARP releases, Alarm Group AGNE parameter will part the set-ne provisioning parameters, therefore will affected this command. ACID, VCType, SNPA ent-osacmap ent-tl1msgmap Issue December 1997 11-77 DDM-2000...
  • Page 495 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS address used only installation before turning over system. This ensures that parameters system have proper default values before system-specific provisioning done. CAUTION: address should used in-service system. NOTE: The init-sys:all command available privileged users only. This parameter initializes parameters listed...
  • Page 496 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS Site Shelf — OC-12 Release later TARP releases, Site parameters will available, therefore affected this command. set-ne TBOS CO/RT selection — OC-12 Release later TARP releases, TBOS parameter will available, therefore will affected this command. set-ne UserSide/NetworkSide settings Channel set-fecom...
  • Page 497 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS CO/RT selection UserSide/NetworkSide settings channel enable/disable enable/disable When command entered, following confirmation init-sys:sysctl message will displayed: ’ NOTE: Executing init-sys:sysctl cause system respond with following message: This Parameters default values. means that circuit pack specified slot failed been removed, parameters...
  • Page 498 INIT-SYS Page INIT-SYS Entering command will cause following confirmation init-sys:all message displayed: ’ RELATED COMMANDS reset Issue December 1997 11-81 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 499 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG NAME ins-prog: Install Program INPUT FORMAT ins-prog: TID; DESCRIPTION This command installs program into system controller. This command supports local program installation network element from personal computer (PC) connected port target system. command used copy system controller program from local...
  • Page 500 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG input parameter Target Identifier (system name) shelf into which program will loaded. TIDs case insensitive. command syntax correct, following message will displayed: This command only completed successfully executed from modem port received over DCC. This command cannot executed during remote...
  • Page 501 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG this command used install program certain product type while shelf into which program will loaded identifies different product type (for example, program installed DDM-2000 OC-3 product type, while target product type FT-2000), request will denied following message displayed: <...
  • Page 502 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG support remote program installation from local system that connects target system must running compatible programs. support local program installation from local (target) system that connects must running compatible programs. programs compatible, following denial message will displayed: remote program installation, target...
  • Page 503 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG entered does match remote NE’s (only NSAP matched this case), this command will denied following message displayed: < > above message, NSAP represents remote NE’s NSAP. receives this command able determine TID-NSAP translation, NSAP unreachable (TID kept same, NSAP must...
  • Page 504 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG user attempts download software that incompatible with shelf type (for example, DDM-2000 OC-12 software into DDM-2000 OC-3 system), controller type OC-12 shelves equipped with BBG8/BCP4 controllers, following denial message will displayed: When upgrading software, following confirmation message will displayed after...
  • Page 505 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG When this command used download release software (into dormant memory remote system) that significantly different from software currently running remote system, download software into dormant memory local system from where software downloaded significantly different from software currently running local system,...
  • Page 506 INS-PROG Page INS-PROG RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-eqpt rtrv-ne Issue December 1997 11-89 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 507 LOGOUT Page LOGOUT NAME logout: Terminate Session INPUT FORMAT logout; DESCRIPTION This command terminates user session. this command entered during local session, will terminate sessions established user. entered during remote session, this command will terminate remote session return user local session.
  • Page 508 OPR-ACO Page OPR-ACO NAME opr-aco: Operate Alarm Cutoff INPUT FORMAT opr-aco; DESCRIPTION This command silences audible office alarms. Alarms remain silent until alarm condition arises. this command executed while there active alarm condition system, will: Silence active audible office alarms Light alarm cut-off...
  • Page 509 OPR-LPBK-EC1 Page OPR-LPBK-EC1 NAME opr-lpbk-ec1: Operate-Loopback-EC1 INPUT FORMAT opr-lpbk-ec1: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command executes loopback low-speed STS1E interface towards optical fiber (terminal) (facility), shown Figure 11-1. Both terminal facility loopback same time.
  • Page 510 OPR-LPBK-EC1 Page OPR-LPBK-EC1 input parameters are: Address EC-1 port(s) looped back. Address Valid EC-1 Port Addresses: {a,b,c,d}-{1-3,all} loopbacktype specifies whether loopback terminal facility lpbktype terminal loopback directed towards high-speed terminal facility. This default value. facility loopback directed towards DSX. facility slot determined have...
  • Page 511 OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 NAME opr-lpbk-t3: Operate-Loopback-T3 INPUT FORMAT opr-lpbk-t3: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command executes loopback port towards optical fiber (terminal) (facility), shown Figure 11-2. terminal facility loopbacks cannot same time. loopback remains place until...
  • Page 512 OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 input parameters are: Address port(s) looped back. Address Valid Port Addresses: {a,b,c,d}-{1-3,all} loopbacktype specifies whether loopback terminal facility lpbktype terminal loopback directed towards high-speed terminal facility. This default value. facility loopback directed towards DSX. facility loopback type consistent with address,...
  • Page 513 OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 command cannot completed hardware problems SYSCTL, following message displayed: this command invoked establish other than existing loopback type (that facility loopback requested when terminal loopback already exists vice versa) same address, following denial message will displayed: When input terminal loopback,...
  • Page 514 OPR-LPBK-T3 Page OPR-LPBK-T3 When input facility loopback, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rls-lpbk-t3 Issue December 1997 11-97 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 515 RESET Page RESET NAME reset: Reset System Software Program INPUT FORMAT reset; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect performance-monitoring data. This command resets system software program. history performance-monitoring data lost. alarm information lost "rediscovered." date time lost "rediscovered" from default date time).
  • Page 516 RESET Page RESET When input, this command displays following confirmation message: During system start-up after reset other initialization, user connected port cannot When user presses RETURN, following message issued: Issue December 1997 11-99 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 517 RLGN Page RLGN NAME rlgn: Remote Login INPUT FORMAT rlgn: TID; DESCRIPTION This command establishes remote login session SONET data communications channel (DCC). network element (NE) which part same maintenance subnetwork compatible product type accessed with this command. alarm status report system printed...
  • Page 518 RLGN Page RLGN user logged into shelf then tries remotely login same shelf, following denial message will displayed: user toggled back local after establishing remote session tries return remote session using this command, following denial message will displayed: user attempts into system whose...
  • Page 519 RLGN Page RLGN unknown could found) entered, following message will displayed user will reprompted TID: unknown unable determine TID-NSAP translation entered could found) entered, this command will denied following message displayed: entered does match remote NE’s TID, (only NSAP matched this case), this...
  • Page 520 RLGN Page RLGN receives this command able determine TID-NSAP translation, NSAP unreachable (TID kept same, NSAP must have been changed) other reason, remote simply reachable, this command will denied following message displayed: < > above message, NSAP represents found TID-NSAP translation.
  • Page 521 RLS-LPBK-EC1 Page RLS-LPBK-EC1 NAME rls-lpbk-ec1: Release-Loopback-EC1 INPUT FORMAT rls-lpbk-ec1: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION This command releases previously established loopback low-speed STS1E interface. input parameters are: Address EC-1 port(s) where loopback released. Address Valid EC-1 Port Addresses: all, {a,b,c,d}-{1-3,all} loopbacktype specifies whether loopback...
  • Page 522 RLS-LPBK-T3 Page RLS-LPBK-T3 NAME rls-lpbk-t3: Release-Loopback-T3 INPUT FORMAT rls-lpbk-t3: Address [:lpbktype= LoopbackType ]; DESCRIPTION This command releases loopback port previously established opr-lpbk-t3 command. input parameter Address port(s) where loopback released. Address Valid Port Addresses: all, {a,b,c,d}-{1-3,all} Loopbacktype specifies whether loopback terminal facility, lpbktype...
  • Page 523 RSTR-PASSWD Page RSTR-PASSWD NAME rstr-passwd: Restore Logins, Passwords, User Types INPUT FORMAT rstr-passwd: login , passwd , user_type , clr ; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command available privileged users only. This command only used restore login, password encrypted encoded form), user type information from...
  • Page 524 RSTR-PASSWD Page RSTR-PASSWD reports-only reports-only user only execute basic commands that extract reports from system. This parameter indicates whether login data existing should deleted before login, password, user type information restored. This parameter have following values: Clear login file before restoring login clear...
  • Page 525 RSTR-PASSWD Page RSTR-PASSWD user attempts restore another user when maximum privileged number users already been reached, this attempt will privileged denied following message will displayed: attempt made restore already existing privileged user’s login/password information with either user_type general, maintenance or this attempt denied...
  • Page 526 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM NAME rtrv-alm: Retrieve Alarm Status INPUT FORMAT rtrv-alm[:alm= AlarmLevel ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays report active alarm status conditions local network element. report includes source address alarm well date time alarm, whether condition service-affecting, short description condition. input parameter AlarmLevel...
  • Page 527 RTRV-ATTR-ALM Page RTRV-ATTR-ALM NAME rtrv-attr-alm: Retrieve Attribute Alarm INPUT FORMAT rtrv-attr-alm; DESCRIPTION This command displays current alarm attributes, provisioned set-attr-alm command. output report appears follows: output parameters are: This shows alarm holdoff delay seconds incoming Alarm Delay signal equipment failures. This parameter integer...
  • Page 528 RTRV-ATTR-ALM Page RTRV-ATTR-ALM RELATED COMMANDS set-attr-alm Issue December 1997 11-111 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 529: Miscellaneous Discretes

    RTRV-ATTR-CONT Page RTRV-ATTR-CONT NAME rtrv-attr-cont: Retrieve Attribute Control INPUT FORMAT rtrv-attr-cont[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioned name miscellaneous discrete environmental control points, set-attr-cont command. input parameter Address environmental control point. default address Address cont-all. Valid Addresses: cont-{1-4,all} output report appears follows:...
  • Page 530 RTRV-ATTR-CONT Page RTRV-ATTR-CONT NOTE: This command will denied entered system whose SYSCTL CO/RT parameter (via command). set-ne command determine switch setting. following denial rtrv-ne message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-attr-env rtrv-ne set-attr-cont set-attr-env Issue December 1997 11-113 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 531 RTRV-ATTR-ENV Page RTRV-ATTR-ENV NAME rtrv-attr-env: Retrieve Attribute Environment INPUT FORMAT rtrv-attr-env[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioned alarm provisioned name provisioned alarm type miscellaneous discrete environmental alarm/status points, set-attr-env command. input parameter address environmental input point. Address Valid Addresses: env-{1-21}, env-{all} (default) output report...
  • Page 532 RTRV-ATTR-ENV Page RTRV-ATTR-ENV Alarm provisioned alarm level environmental input Alarm following values: Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm alarmed, reported This user-defined classification environmental Alarm Type alarm/status point. Provisioned description environmental alarm/status point. Description NOTE: This command will denied entered system whose SYSCTL...
  • Page 533 RTRV-CRS-STS1 Page RTRV-CRS-STS1 NAME rtrv-crs-sts1: Retrieve Cross-Connection STS-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-crs-sts1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves STS-1 cross-connections within DDM-2000 system. Cross-connections entered using ent-crs-sts1 command. OC-12, STS-3c cross-connections possible between Main-B slots function unit slots will displayed this report.
  • Page 534 RTRV-CRS-STS1 Page RTRV-CRS-STS1 output report appears follows: NOTE: Starting with OC-12 Release each cross-connection reported only once (not once each direction). above report lists both STS-1 STS-3c cross connections applicable) separate sections. output report shows channels order that reflects physical layout system (for...
  • Page 535 RTRV-CRS-STS1 Page RTRV-CRS-STS1 RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-sts1 ent-crs-sts1 Issue December 1997 11-118 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 536 RTRV-CRS-STS3c Page RTRV-CRS-STS3c NAME rtrv-crs-sts3c: Retrieve Cross-Connection STS-3c INPUT FORMAT rtrv-crs-sts3c[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves STS-3c cross-connections within DDM-2000 system. Cross-connections entered using ent-crs-sts3c command. This command available with OC-12 ring releases. NOTE: Slots equipped with different pack types (for example,...
  • Page 537 RTRV-CRS-STS3c Page RTRV-CRS-STS3c & output report shows STS-3c channels order that reflects physical layout system (for example, high-speed slots shown first, followed those associated with function unit function unit etc.). output report also shows STS-1 channels applicable) separate section. STS-1 channels listed same...
  • Page 538 RTRV-EC1 Page RTRV-EC1 NAME rtrv-ec1: Retrieve EC-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-ec1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves information about each EC-1 port. This information includes attributes command, well parameters set-ec1 switches circuit pack. input parameter This address more EC-1 ports. default address Address is all...
  • Page 539 RTRV-EC1 Page RTRV-EC1 output parameters are: This column lists address more EC-1 ports. Port Address This column shows alarm level incoming EC-1 Alarm Level signal failure have following values: Critical Major Minor Alarmed This column shows signal degrade threshold EC-1 Signal Degrade port...
  • Page 540 RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT NAME rtrv-eqpt: Retrieve Equipment INPUT FORMAT rtrv-eqpt[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays circuit pack type version information more slots network element (NE). input parameter Address identifies more slot(s). default all slots. Address Valid Slot Addresses: all, main-{a,b,all}-{1-2,all}, tsi-{1,2,all}, fn-{a,b,c,d,all}-{1,2,all},...
  • Page 541 RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT X.X.X Issue December 1997 11-124 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 542 RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT output parameters are: This address slot. Address Circuit pack mnemonic name that identifies Circuit Pack general type function provided circuit pack. example, Optical Line Interface Units named OLIU; SYStem ConTroLlers named SYSCTL. Apparatus code uniquely identifies specific function Apparatus Code...
  • Page 543 RTRV-EQPT Page RTRV-EQPT incorrect circuit pack inserted slot, report will show expected circuit pack name that slot indicate that current circuit pack does match inventory. faulty circuit pack with unreadable version recognition information placed slot, report will indicate that circuit pack failed version...
  • Page 544 RTRV-FEAT Page RTRV-FEAT NAME rtrv-feat: Retrieve Feature INPUT FORMAT rtrv-feat; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves list active feature options enabled set-feat command. output report appears follows: output parameters are: This name feature currently enabled. Feature Option Description feature. Description RELATED COMMANDS set-feat Issue December...
  • Page 545 RTRV-FECOM Page RTRV-FECOM NAME rtrv-fecom: Retrieve Far-end Communications INPUT FORMAT rtrv-fecom:[ Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioned state network element’s (NE’s) section data communication channels (DCC), interface, set-fecom command. embedded overhead communications channel SONET line used end-to-end communications maintenance. carries alarm, control,...
  • Page 546 RTRV-FECOM Page RTRV-FECOM far-end communication output report appears follows: output parameters this report are: This column displays address LAN. DCC/LAN Address This column shows whether communication over Communication enabled disabled. network side/user side (NS/US) parameter settings NS/US available with BBG8 controller identify setting...
  • Page 547 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY NAME rtrv-hsty: Retrieve History INPUT FORMAT rtrv-hsty; DESCRIPTION This command displays event-history report. This report contains list most recent system events. This report will contain events. events listed last-in, first-out order, date- time-stamped. NOTE: large number conditions reported, RTRV-HSTY report...
  • Page 548 RTRV-LGN Page RTRV-LGN NAME rtrv-lgn: Retrieve Login INPUT FORMAT rtrv-lgn; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves login authorization information. This report lists each user’s login privileges. report does contain passwords. NOTE: This command available privileged users only. output report appears follows: output parameters are: This...
  • Page 549 RTRV-LGN Page RTRV-LGN NOTE: There always three (and only three) privileged logins DDM-2000 system. RELATED COMMANDS set-lgn set-secu rtrv-secu Issue December 1997 11-132 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 550 RTRV-LINK Page RTRV-LINK NAME rtrv-link: Retrieve Link Configuration INPUT FORMAT rtrv-link; DESCRIPTION This command displays currently-provisioned parameters user’s craft interface link, command. This includes link which set-link user logged into, baud rate, page length reports. baud rate autobaud provisionable parameter. output report appears...
  • Page 551 RTRV-LINK Page RTRV-LINK "aa" allow system automatically baud rate rate terminal workstation attached port. RELATED COMMANDS set-link rtrv-ne Issue December 1997 11-134 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 552 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR NAME rtrv-map-neighbor: Retrieve Neighbor INPUT FORMAT rtrv-map-neighbor; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality command OC-12 Release later OC-12 rtrv-map-neighbor TARP releases. This command displays immediate and/or neighbors that reachable local Network Element (NE). TIDs included this report always determined...
  • Page 553 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR following example report under normal conditions applicable OC-12 Release later: Note that NSAP value part same line other reported information, wrapped around based 80-column screen width. NOTE Multiple Area Addresses have been provisioned other local NE’s area, TARP NSAP-to-TID translation...
  • Page 554 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR output report parameters are: This column contains local direct and/or neighbors. time local unable determine neighbor’s NSAP, this report will indicate this showing "?" column. Connected Through This column contains address optical lines and/or through which local directly connected identified...
  • Page 555 RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR Page RTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR OC-3 shelf function unit (fn-b-2) another OC-3 shelf; corresponding report will list each neighbor with specific function unit slot number under "Connected Through". report will displayed follows: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-map-network Issue December 1997 11-138 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 556 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK NAME rtrv-map-network: Retrieve Network INPUT FORMAT rtrv-map-network[:Level2= level2 ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality command OC-12 Release later OC-12 rtrv-map-network TARP releases. This command displays Network Elements (NEs) same Level area that reachable local through LAN.
  • Page 557 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK this command issued that provisioned Level value "Y", command will denied following level2 message displayed: following example output report: Note that NSAP value part same line other information, wrapped around based 80-column screen width. local listed first report.
  • Page 558 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK This product type local (for example, DDM-2000 Product Type OC-3). This column identifies whether listed default Level Level local Level this will indicated "Y" under this column. Possible values are: "Y" " ". blank indicates non-Level (Level NE).
  • Page 559 RTRV-MAP-NETWORK Page RTRV-MAP-NETWORK NOTE event Multiple Network Layer Area Addresses have been provisioned other local NE’s area, none TARP NSAP-to-TID queries were successful, this report will list each possible NSAPs (each NSAP corresponding multiple Area Addresses) remote along with "?" displayed column.
  • Page 560 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE NAME rtrv-ne: Retrieve Network Element INPUT FORMAT rtrv-ne; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality rtrv-ne command OC-12 Release later OC-12 TARP releases. This command displays information that provisioned set-ne command switches SYSCTL pack. output report appears follows: The hw after...
  • Page 561 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE value system will insert unequipped unequipped signal toward SONET line when channels cross- connected equipped with path terminating equipment. Shelf shelf address identifies physical Shelf position shelf bay. CO/RT Selector types TBOS displays provided support central office remote terminal applications.
  • Page 562 RTRV-NE Page RTRV-NE Apply This parameter reported starting with OC-12 Action Release 7.0. dormant software generic currently stored network element, command scheduled program apply installation with Action=install on Date=date and Time=time date reported digit YYMMDD, time HH:MM:SS program installation scheduled yet, blank "...
  • Page 563 RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 NAME rtrv-oc3: Retrieve INPUT FORMAT rtrv-oc3[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays configuration OC-3 lines, set-oc3 command. input parameter follows: Address identifies OC-3 line(s). default Address all. Valid Addresses: all, fn-{a,b,c,d}-{1,2,all}, fn-all output report appears follows: The Concat mode only visible...
  • Page 564 RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 setting determined hardware switch OLIU circuit pack. This parameter have following values: High optical power high optical power — hyphen indicates that optical power settable switches OLIU circuit pack. valid values this parameter enabled indicating Kbyte Message that proprietary Sync...
  • Page 565 RTRV-OC3 Page RTRV-OC3 RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-sync Issue December 1997 11-148 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 566 RTRV-OC12 Page RTRV-OC12 NAME rtrv-oc12: Retrieve OC12 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-oc12[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays configuration OC-12 lines provisioned set-oc12 command. input parameter follows: Address identifies OC-12 line(s). default Address all. Valid addresses: all, main-b-{1,2,all} NOTE: slot equipped with different pack types...
  • Page 567 RTRV-OC12 Page RTRV-OC12 output parameters are: Address OC-12 line. Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold This error rate (BER) threshold logarithm base value integer with range − 5 − 9 through corresponding BERs through slot empty equipped with something other than OC-12 optical unit,...
  • Page 568 RTRV-OSACMAP Page RTRV-OSACMAP NAME rtrv-osacmap: Retrieve Operation Systems Application Context INPUT FORMAT rtrv-osacmap; DESCRIPTION This command displays Operation Systems Application Context information that created command. This information ent-osacmap provides association information between application contexts X.25 channel assignments. NOTE: While this command allowed network...
  • Page 569 RTRV-OSACMAP Page RTRV-OSACMAP output parameters are: VCType X.25 SubNetwork Virtual Channel Type. valid Type values are: Permanent Virtual Circuit Switched Virtual Circuit. SNPA Address SNPA Address X.25 SubNetwork Point Attachment address either Logical Channel Number (LCN) VCType Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) calling address...
  • Page 570 RTRV-OSACMAP Page RTRV-OSACMAP RELATED COMMANDS ent-tl1msgmap rtrv-tl1msgmap ent-osacmap dlt-osacmap Issue December 1997 11-153 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 571 RTRV-PASSWD Page RTRV-PASSWD NAME rtrv-passwd: Retrieve Passwords INPUT FORMAT rtrv-passwd; DESCRIPTION This command displays logins, passwords encrypted form), user type logins system. This command should used back this only information external workstation. Additional workstation software command will used rstr-passwd re-create this information network...
  • Page 572 RTRV-PASSWD Page RTRV-PASSWD RELATED COMMANDS rstr-passwd rtrv-lgn set-lgn set-passwd Issue December 1997 11-155 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 573 RTRV-PM-LINE Page RTRV-PM-LINE NAME rtrv-pm-line: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Line INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-line: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays performance-monitoring data associated with OC-3, OC-12, EC-1 lines terminated system. NOTE: Main slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), output report this...
  • Page 574 RTRV-PM-LINE Page RTRV-PM-LINE This parameter shows number coding violations data collection interval that started time reported previous column. This parameter shows number errored seconds data collection interval. This parameter shows number severely errored seconds. This parameter shows number Type errored seconds data collection...
  • Page 575 RTRV-PM-LINE Page RTRV-PM-LINE RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-sect rtrv-pm-tca rtrv-pmthres-line set-pmthres-line Issue December 1997 11-158 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 576 RTRV-PM-SECT Page RTRV-PM-SECT NAME rtrv-pm-sect: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Section INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-sect: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays performance-monitoring data associated with OC-1, OC-3 OC-12 optics STS-3 STS-12 section. NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), report will include...
  • Page 577 RTRV-PM-SECT Page RTRV-PM-SECT output parameters are: This indicates address OC-3 OC-12 Address line. This indicates time system clock when Start Time data collection started. This column shows whether transmit power Transmit Power -1dB threshold crossing occurred data collection interval starting time reported previous...
  • Page 578 RTRV-PM-SECT Page RTRV-PM-SECT RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-line rtrv-pm-tca rtrv-pmthres-sect set-pmthres-sect Issue December 1997 11-161 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 579 RTRV-PM-STS1 Page RTRV-PM-STS1 NAME rtrv-pm-sts1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring STS-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-sts1: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command reports path performance-monitoring data associated with STS-1 signals terminating network element. most STS-1 cross-connected paths, data collected active path signals only active path reported.
  • Page 580 RTRV-PM-STS1 Page RTRV-PM-STS1 output report appears follows: output parameters are: This column shows address monitored signal. Address This column indicates time system clock when Start Time data collection started. This column shows number coding violations. This column shows number errored seconds.
  • Page 581 RTRV-PM-STS1 Page RTRV-PM-STS1 hyphen indicates that count that parameter available trouble condition. blank indicates that report field does apply. question mark following count indicates that count includes data less than full counting interval. This occur reset or command entered into system DS3, EC1,...
  • Page 582 RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 NAME rtrv-pm-t3: Retrieve Performance Monitoring INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-t3: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command displays performance-monitoring data associated with more signals passing through system. This report enhanced display performance monitoring data line path incoming from DSX-3, addition previously displayed data path...
  • Page 583 RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 output report appears follows: output parameters are: This shows address signal incoming from Address DSX-3 fiber. Type Direction This shows type data (line, path, path far-end) direction from which signal received (dsx-3 fiber). This indicates time system clock when data...
  • Page 584 RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 This shows number P-bit, adjusted F&M bit, C-bit parity CV-P coding violations signal incoming from DSX-3 fiber. This shows number path errored seconds ES-P signal incoming from DSX-3 fiber. This shows number path severely errored seconds SES-P signal incoming from...
  • Page 585 RTRV-PM-T3 Page RTRV-PM-T3 blank indicates that report field does apply. question mark following count indicates that count includes data less than full counting interval. This occur reset or set-date command entered into system and/or TMUX circuit pack inserted removed, terminal facility loopback established.
  • Page 586 RTRV-PM-TCA Page RTRV-PM-TCA NAME rtrv-pm-tca: Retrieve Performance Monitoring INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pm-tca; DESCRIPTION This command displays number threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) associated with signals terminating passing through system. occurs when performance-monitoring counter exceeds user-selected threshold. NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example,...
  • Page 587 RTRV-PM-TCA Page RTRV-PM-TCA This shows total number TCAs associated with section Section performance monitoring parameters (severely errored frame seconds). This shows total number TCAs associated with line Line performance monitoring parameters Type Type SES, UAS, PSC, PJC). This shows total number TCAs associated...
  • Page 588 RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE Page RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE NAME rtrv-pmthres-line: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold Line INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-line; DESCRIPTION This command displays system’s current OC-3 OC-12 line performance parameter thresholds, set-pmthres-line command. NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), this report will include data...
  • Page 589 RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE Page RTRV-PMTHRES-LINE This parameter displays Coding Violations threshold values coding violation counts EC-1 lines. This parameter displays Errored Seconds threshold values B2ES count. This parameter displays Errored Seconds Type threshold values B2ESA count. This parameter displays Errored Seconds Type threshold values B2ESB...
  • Page 590 RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT Page RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT NAME rtrv-pmthres-sect: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold Section INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-sect; DESCRIPTION This command displays system’s current section performance parameter thresholds, set-pmthres-sect command. output report appears follows: Values first three output parameters enabled and disabled The output parameters are: OLIU transmit...
  • Page 591 RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT Page RTRV-PMTHRES-SECT RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-sect rtrv-pm-tca set-pmthres-sect Issue December 1997 11-174 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 592 RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 NAME rtrv-pmthres-sts1: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold STS-1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-sts1; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves system’s STS-1 path performance monitoring thresholds, set-pmthres-sts1 command. output report appears follows: first column report contains names path performance monitoring parameters. second third columns contain quarter-hour...
  • Page 593 RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-STS1 This parameter shows threshold type errored B3ESB seconds. This parameter shows threshold number severely B3SES errored seconds. This parameter shows threshold unavailable seconds B3UAS service. RELATED COMMANDS init-pm set-pmthres-sts1 rtrv-pm-sts1 rtrv-pm-tca Issue December 1997 11-176 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 594 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 NAME rtrv-pmthres-t3: Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold INPUT FORMAT rtrv-pmthres-t3; DESCRIPTION This command displays system’s current performance parameter thresholds, set-pmthres-t3 command. output report appears follows: NOTE: line parameters, addition C-bit parity other path parameters incoming signal from DSX-3, only applicable when...
  • Page 595 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 output parameters are: These parameters display threshold coding violations count line B3ZS data. negative value this parameter indicates that threshold specified terms equivalent error ratio (BER) These parameters display threshold errored seconds count line with least B3ZS coding violation.
  • Page 596 RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 Page RTRV-PMTHRES-T3 These parameters display threshold far-end C-bit CPFE coding violation counts. This path parameter that applies incoming signal from both DSX-3 fiber. negative threshold value indicates that coding violation threshold specified terms equivalent These parameters display threshold far-end C-bit ESPFE errored...
  • Page 597 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU NAME rtrv-secu: Retrieve Security INPUT FORMAT rtrv-secu; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves ports security timeout information. Starting with OC-12 Release 7.0, this command will also report users currently logged into Network Element CIT, ports. This command will report also users logged...
  • Page 598 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU output parameters are: Access link address interface. Access Link Valid Addresses: dcc, cit-{1,2} Security shows whether security enabled, disabled, Security lockout state listed port. valid values are enabled, disabled or When security lockout enabled, user must enter valid login password...
  • Page 599 RTRV-SECU Page RTRV-SECU Active User This parameter available starting with OC-12 Release 7.0. This parameter reports user’s login that currently logged into communication port identified Address column. user currently logged time report, this parameter reported dash (—). RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-lgn set-secu Issue December...
  • Page 600 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT NAME rtrv-state-eqpt: Retrieve State Equipment INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-eqpt[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays slot, port, protection switching state information network element (NE). NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), report will include data what considered...
  • Page 601 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT report. output parameters are: Address address slot. Address Circuit Pack Circuit pack circuit pack name. hyphen means applicable equipped. Port State(s) state signal, from DS-3 EC-1 signals, reported. Port State blank have following values: (In-Service) this state, port monitored failures,...
  • Page 602 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT received ring channels incoming from this OLIU active. This determined using rtrv- command this system. Some state-path transmitted ring channels outgoing fiber also active. This determined using the rtrv-state-path command all remote systems. slot ring applications, this means that active-fn...

  • Page 603: Path Protection Switching

    RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT path protection switching information. NOTE: protected packs, Switch Priority displayed both packs; Switch Priority displayed pack displayed other. Switch priority following: protection switches will done until switch inhibit reset. lockout protection This prevents access protection pack group. lockout service This...
  • Page 604 RTRV-STATE-EQPT Page RTRV-STATE-EQPT This occurs following four automatic switches from service protection during 10-minute interval. APS-wait restore Automatic protection switching occurred, service line good service will revert back original source after specified period time. Traffic been manually switched protection. manual —...
  • Page 605 RTRV-STATE-OC3 Page RTRV-STATE-OC3 NAME rtrv-state-oc3: Retrieve state OC-3 lines. INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-oc3[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves OC-3 line states. input parameter Address address OC-3 lines whose state Address reported. default OC-3 lines. Other valid addresses are: fn-all, fn-{a,b,c,d}-{1,2,all} output report appears...
  • Page 606 RTRV-STATE-OC3 Page RTRV-STATE-OC3 output parameters are: Address address OC-3 line. Address Line State state OC-3 line identified Line State address field. have following values: Service. line monitored. Alarm, status conditions, PMON data reported normally. Monitored. Alarm status conditions nmon line reported.
  • Page 607 RTRV-STATE-PATH Page RTRV-STATE-PATH NAME rtrv-state-path: Retrieve State Path INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-path[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays signal path state information path-protected signals dropped network element (NE). determine which transmitted ring channels outgoing fiber active, necessary also the rtrv-state-eqpt command remote systems.
  • Page 608 RTRV-STATE-PATH Page RTRV-STATE-PATH output report appears follows: output parameters are: The address STS-1 and/or STS-3c path. Address report always displays both Ring Ring addresses. This column indicates whether associated Ring path (receive into local main-b-1) Ring path (receive into local main-b-2) active.
  • Page 609 RTRV-STATE-PATH Page RTRV-STATE-PATH allowed, because lower priority than requests, only requests will appear report. conditions will remain active while condition that caused switch still exists. When that failure clears, condition changed blank other requests exist. RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-state-eqpt switch-path-sts1 switch-path-sts3c Issue December 1997...

  • Page 610: Rtrv-State-Sts1

    RTRV-STATE-STS1 Page RTRV-STATE-STS1 NAME rtrv-state-sts1: Retrieve State STS-1 Channels INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-sts1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves STS-1 channel states. NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during upgrade), report will include data what considered time valid system pack type.
  • Page 611 RTRV-STATE-STS1 Page RTRV-STATE-STS1 NOTE: empty report displayed there cross-connections channels monitored (for example, pass-through cross-connections). output parameters are: Address address STS-1 channel. Address Channel State state STS-1 channel identified Channel State address field. have following values: Automatic. There good signal this auto channel.

  • Page 612: Rtrv-State-Sts3C

    RTRV-STATE-STS3c Page RTRV-STATE-STS3c NAME rtrv-state-sts3c: Retrieve State STS-3c Channels INPUT FORMAT rtrv-state-sts3c[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves STS-3c channel states. This command available with OC-12 ring releases. input parameter Address address STS-3c channels whose state Address reported. default STS-3c channels.
  • Page 613 RTRV-STATE-STS3c Page RTRV-STATE-STS3c output parameters are: Address address STS-3c channel. Address Channel State state STS-3c channel identified Channel State address field. have following values: Automatic. There good signal this auto channel. Alarm status conditions associated with this channel reported. good signal detected this...

  • Page 614: Rtrv-Sts1

    RTRV-STS1 Page RTRV-STS1 NAME rtrv-sts1: Retrieve STS1 INPUT FORMAT rtrv-sts1[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves types provisioned parameters STS-1 channels. parameter types are: signal degrade alarm threshold alarm level sa/nsa path condition NOTE: slots equipped with different pack types (for example, during...
  • Page 615 RTRV-STS1 Page RTRV-STS1 When default address entered, output report appears follows: address anything then report appears follows: Issue December 1997 11-198 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 616 RTRV-STS1 Page RTRV-STS1 parameter valid application, example non-ring application, then report appears output parameters are: This signal degrade threshold value. SignalDegrade This address provisioned channel. address more columns information will show alarm Alarm values service affecting (SA) non-service affecting (NSA) alarms.

  • Page 617: Rtrv-Sts3C

    RTRV-STS3c Page RTRV-STS3c NAME rtrv-sts3c: Retrieve STS3c INPUT FORMAT rtrv-sts3c[: Address ] DESCRIPTION This command retrieves information about dropped STS-3c channels. This information consists signal degrade threshold value STS-3c path alarm value that provisioned using set-sts3c command. input parameter Address address STS-3c channels...
  • Page 618 RTRV-STS3c Page RTRV-STS3c more columns information will show alarm Alarm values service affecting (SA) non-service affecting (NSA) alarms. alarms have following values: Critical alarm (default ring channels) Minor alarm (non-ring channels only, default) alarmed, reported alarmed reported (non-ring channels only) alarms have following...

  • Page 619: Rtrv-Sync

    RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC NAME rtrv-sync: Retrieve Synchronization INPUT FORMAT rtrv-sync; DESCRIPTION This command displays provisioning operational information synchronization attributes DDM-2000, set-sync command. NOTE: Beginning with DDM-2000 OC-12 Release later, this command will also used with Stratum timing circuit pack, (BBF4). This pack used...
  • Page 620 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC following report OC-12 Releases: output parameters reports follows. Some parameters apply reports. output parameters are: sync source optical line provisioned from which shelf Sync Source (and optionally, sync output) timing derived. shelf timing mode sync output timing LineTimed also selected,...
  • Page 621 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC — (dash) Timing mode hardware provisioned FreeRunning External without sync outputs mult). choices Sync Source (except dash) followed these messages: Sync Source LineTimed shelf. Shelf only Shelf Outputs Sync Source LineTimed shelf/Sync Out. Outputs only Sync Source External shelf timing/Sync...
  • Page 622 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC Active Timing Mode Active timing mode active timing synchronization mode system. value values listed previously following: Provisioned Mode Timing generator operating holdover Holdover mode because provisioned references available because system been manually switched holdover mode. Timing circuit packs have been...
  • Page 623 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC When active timing mode Holdover Active Reference/Line timing reference that will provide timing system switches holdover mode. When Provisioned Mode FreeRunning Active Reference Active Line reported. Mode Switching Mode Switching indicates whether mode switching timing generator revertive nonrevertive.
  • Page 624 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC sync This mode indicates that timing derived from terminating OC-12 line used network synchronization. (This mode only available with BBF2B BBF4 circuit pack.) Output Mode Output Mode identifies whether timing output derivation will track transmission lock particular line with values:...
  • Page 625 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC inserted failure exists that prohibits tracing output incoming optical line. also inserted certain incoming synchronization message quality levels active timing source. — Indicates slot auto state. circuit pack unreadable, slot equipped empty. Active Reference This shows actual line that timing...
  • Page 626 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC Timing Looped Back network element connected this interface line-timed from (Quality Level interface receiving timing from Stratum Stratum clock source (Quality Level Internal Clock This interface receiving timing from system holdover free running (Quality Level This applicable DDM-2000 systems equipped...
  • Page 627 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC interface receiving message Undefined byte that defined standards (Quality Level Upon receiving this message, system treats same message. Don’t Traceable SONET interface receiving timing from system holdover free running (Quality Level This message equivalent Internal Clock Kbyte messaging.
  • Page 628 RTRV-SYNC Page RTRV-SYNC optical interfaces provisioned Kbyte will Stratum Stratum Stratum respectively. This column identifies type sync messaging Type optical interface provisioned using set-oc3 and/or set-oc12 command. valid values are: Kbyte Sbyte disabled Sync Autoreconfiguration This capability allows system choose best timing source...

  • Page 629: Rtrv-T3

    RTRV-T3 Page RTRV-T3 NAME rtrv-t3: Retrieve INPUT FORMAT rtrv-t3[: Address ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays port provisioning report ports, set-t3 command. input parameter Address identifies ports. port ports Address specified. default address all. Valid Port Addresses: {a,b,c,d}-{1-3,all}, output report appears follows: Issue December...
  • Page 630 RTRV-T3 Page RTRV-T3 output parameters are: Port Address address port Port Address Mode violation monitor removal mode Mode signal. have following values: Monitor remove P-bit errors (default value). Monitor remove P-bit errors. Clear channel. monitor remove P-bit errors. — This parameter does apply...
  • Page 631 RTRV-T3 Page RTRV-T3 State state port with values: State In-service. valid signal from DSX-3 being monitored. Automatic. system waiting valid auto signal from DSX-3. Monitored nmon This column shows performance monitoring (PM) Mode mode interface, following values: enabled this port (default value).
  • Page 632 RTRV-T3 Page RTRV-T3 This parameter indicates type path PMON that Format will appear report. This parameter will appear only vmr or vm mode already been selected. BBF20 TMUX circuit pack, this parameter will always appear. This parameter have following values: When this value...

  • Page 633: Rtrv-Tl1Msgmap

    RTRV-TL1MSGMAP Page RTRV-TL1MSGMAP NAME rtrv-tl1msgmap: Retrieve Message Operation Systems INPUT FORMAT rtrv-tl1msgmap; DESCRIPTION This command displays table that associates Application Context Identifier (ACID) autonomous message types. This allows DDM-2000 network element direct messages proper destination. output report appears follows: < >...
  • Page 634 RTRV-TL1MSGMAP Page RTRV-TL1MSGMAP output parameters are: ACID Application Context assigned particular ACID SNPA SubNetwork Point Attachment x.25 channel. Each ACID defines type messages sent network element. Default MessageType mappings exist ACIDs supported DDM-2000. Supported ACID values are: tl1Maintenance tl1MemoryAdministration tl1Other1 tl1Test tl1PeerComm tl1Other2 .
  • Page 635 RTRV-TL1MSGMAP Page RTRV-TL1MSGMAP RELATED COMMANDS ent-osacmap dlt-osacmap rtrv-osacmap ent-tl1msgmap Issue December 1997 11-218 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 636: Rtrv-Trace-Sts1

    RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Page RTRV-TRACE-STS1 NAME rtrv-trace-sts1: Retrieve Path Trace Characteristics INPUT FORMAT rtrv-trace-sts1: Address ; DESCRIPTION This command retrieves provisioned transmit receive path traces cross-connected STS-1 channel. command also outputs actual receive path trace, status path trace. NOTE: OC-12, this feature only applicable path...
  • Page 637 RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Page RTRV-TRACE-STS1 output report appears follows: Issue December 1997 11-220 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 638 RTRV-TRACE-STS1 Page RTRV-TRACE-STS1 output parameters are: This channel address SONET path terminating signal Address which path trace assigned. path trace status. This status report incoming trace. Status For rtrv-trace-sts1 messages, status have following values: Good. This indicates that INCTRC and GOOD the EXPTRC match.

  • Page 639: Rtrv-Ulsdcc-L3

    RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 NAME rtrv-ulsdcc-l3: Retrieve Upper Layer Section Layer INPUT FORMAT rtrv-ulsdcc-l3; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality rtrv-ulsdcc-l3 command OC-12 Release later TARP releases. This command currently used retrieve parameters Layers through stack, many which provisioned command. Layer parameters include...
  • Page 640 RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 assigned according International Standards Organization (ISO) standards. SONET systems, value 39840F to indicate that U.S. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) registration authority responsible assignment NSAP address. Where "xx" indicates 2-digit hexadecimal field value local NE’s NSAP. This part NSAP address...
  • Page 641 RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L3 Where "xx" indicates 2-digit hexadecimal Selector field value local NE’s NSAP. This part NSAP address used differentiate multiple NSAP addresses within system. value this field fixed, according usage; "AF" when TARP over CLNP. value "1D" when over CLNP.

  • Page 642: Rtrv-Ulsdcc-L4

    RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 NAME rtrv-ulsdcc-l4: Retrieve Upper Layer Section Layer INPUT FORMAT rtrv-ulsdcc-l4[:tdc_rpt= tdc_rpt ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality rtrv-ulsdcc-l4 command OC-12 Release later TARP releases. This command used retrieve parameters Layer stack, many which provisioned ent-ulsdcc-l4 command. Layer parameters include...
  • Page 643 RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 After entering this command, output report appears follows: Issue December 1997 11-226 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 644 RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 output parameters are: This only string under this string, following L4TM data parameters identified: This parameter reports TARP lifetime L4tlif parameter TARP PDUs originated local TARP lifetime specifies maximum number hops allowed TARP PDU. When this number hops exceeded, TARP...
  • Page 645 RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 This header indicates that what follows 20-byte (40- L4AJ NSAP digit hex) NSAP address entry TARP Manually Adjacent list. maximum Manually Adjacent assigned Where "xxxxxx" indicates 6-digit ajidp hexadecimal field value Manually Adjacent Where "xx" indicates 2-digit hexadecimal ajdfi field...
  • Page 646 RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Where "xx" indicates 2-digit hexadecimal tdcdfi field value that manually entered into TDC. Where "xxxxxx" indicates 6-digit tdcorg hexadecimal NSAP’s Organization field value that manually entered into TARP Data Cache. specifies allocated Network Services Provider Code assigned ANSI-administered Registration Authority...
  • Page 647 RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Page RTRV-ULSDCC-L4 Where "xx" indicates 2-digit hexadecimal tdcsel NSAP’s Selector field value that manually entered into TARP Data Cache. This parameter currently being reported "00". RELATED COMMANDS ent-ulsdcc-l4 ent-ulsdcc-l3 dlt-ulsdcc-l3 dlt-ulsdcc-l4 Issue December 1997 11-230 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 648: Rtrv-X25

    RTRV-X25 Page RTRV-X25 NAME rtrv-x25: Retrieve X.25 link INPUT FORMAT rtrv-x25; DESCRIPTION Three output reports displayed when this command entered. first report displays X.25 link packet size information provisioned command, second report shows status X.25 set-x25 communication. third report provides X.25 event history.
  • Page 649 RTRV-X25 Page RTRV-X25 second report shows state various X.25 communication entities. output report appears follows: output parameters this report are: This column shows various X.25 communication entities. Entity entities are: X.25 (pvc) This communication channel considered upon successful acknowledgement RESET_REQ_IND packet with RESET_CONFRM...
  • Page 650 RTRV-X25 Page RTRV-X25 X.25 (svc) This communication channel considered upon successful acknowledgement CALL_REQ_IND packet with CALL_ACC_CONN packet. This does not imply that communication active. X.25 interface This communication channel considered upon successful acknowledgement RESTART_PACKET packet RESTART_CONFRM packet. This means that layer active ready...
  • Page 651 RTRV-X25 Page RTRV-X25 third output report lists X.25 event history. output report appears follows: output parameters this report are: This column shows date X.25 event occurred. Date This column shows time X.25 event occurred. Time This column shows X.25 communication entity where event...

  • Page 652: Set-Attr-Alm

    SET-ATTR-ALM Page SET-ATTR-ALM NAME set-attr-alm: Alarm Attribute INPUT FORMAT set-attr-alm[:almdel= AlarmDelay ][,clrdel= ClearDelay ][,pmn= PMN ]; DESCRIPTION This command sets alarm holdoff clear delays. input parameters are: AlarmDelay delay incoming signal equipment failures. almdel sets interval time that fault condition present before alarm...
  • Page 653 SET-ATTR-ALM Page SET-ATTR-ALM When input, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-attr-alm Issue December 1997 11-236 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 654: Set-Attr-Cont

    SET-ATTR-CONT Page SET-ATTR-CONT NAME set-attr-cont: Attribute Control INPUT FORMAT set-attr-cont: Address :desc= Description ; DESCRIPTION This command used provision (define) name environmental control points. input parameters are: Address identifies control point provisioned. There Address default this parameter. Valid Addresses: cont-{1-4} Description descriptive name...
  • Page 655 SET-ATTR-CONT Page SET-ATTR-CONT NOTE: This command will denied entered system whose CO/RT parameter (via command). following denial set-ne message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-attr-cont Issue December 1997 11-238 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 656 SET-ATTR-ENV Page SET-ATTR-ENV NAME set-attr-env: Attribute Environment INPUT FORMAT set-attr-env: Address [:alm= Alarm ][,almtype= AlarmType ][,desc= Description ]; DESCRIPTION This command used provision (set) alarm level environmental input points. Active inputs appear entries alarm history reports local network element (NE) generate autonomous messages...

  • Page 657: Set-Attr-Env

    SET-ATTR-ENV Page SET-ATTR-ENV following symbolic characters have special meanings either interface X.25/TL1 interface cannot included description: semicolon question mark sign space back slash exclamation point colon equal sign double quote comma " control characters special keys cannot included description. NOTE: This command will...

  • Page 658: Set-Date

    SET-DATE Page SET-DATE NAME set-date: Date Time INPUT FORMAT set-date:[date= Date ][,time= Time ]; DESCRIPTION This command sets date time. Executing this command will corrupt current quarter hour performance-monitoring (PM) bins. CAUTION: command scheduled execution action =install), apply the set-date command should issued...
  • Page 659 SET-DATE Page SET-DATE When input, this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS apply Issue December 1997 11-242 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 660: Set-Ec1

    SET-EC1 Page SET-EC1 NAME set-ec1: EC-1 INPUT FORMAT set-ec1: Address :[alm= AlarmLevel ][,dgr= SignalDegradeThreshold ]; DESCRIPTION This sets characteristics EC-1 ports. input parameters are: Address address more EC-1 ports. OC-12, address alarm signal degrade thresholds three ports. Valid Addresses: all, a-all, b-all, c-all,...
  • Page 661 SET-EC1 Page SET-EC1 Entering this command will cause following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-ec1 Issue December 1997 11-244 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 662: Set-Feat

    SET-FEAT Page SET-FEAT NAME set-feat: Feature INPUT FORMAT set-feat:feat= Feature ,act= Action ; DESCRIPTION This command enables user configure network element feature options that licensed use. NOTE: This command available privileged users only. input parameters are: Feature feature option available user, have feat...
  • Page 663 SET-FEAT Page SET-FEAT this command entered (timing) packs equipped, there place store backup copy feature options. Thus, command will denied with following message: Enabling feature will cause following confirmation message displayed: < > & Disabling feature will cause following confirmation message displayed: <...
  • Page 664 SET-FEAT Page SET-FEAT RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-feat Issue December 1997 11-247 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 665: Set-Fecom

    SET-FECOM Page SET-FECOM NAME set-fecom: Far-End Communications INPUT FORMAT set-fecom: Address [:com= Communications ][,nsus= NS/US ] [,lanreset= lanreset ]; DESCRIPTION This command enables disables communication over section data communication channels (DCC) LAN. embedded overhead communications channel SONET line used end-to-end communications maintenance.
  • Page 666 SET-FECOM Page SET-FECOM over DCC, other time enable communication over interface. NetworkSide/UserSide (NS/US) identification nsus identity Each must define NS/US identity network. When NS/US parameter same both ends, alarm active. prompted for, parameter nsus Address to lan NetworkSide/UserSide have following parameter values: Network...
  • Page 667 SET-FECOM Page SET-FECOM This paramater available with OC-12 Release lanreset later TARP releases. This parameter prompted for, only only have value either Address "y" "n", with default value "n". this parameter "y", this will cause resetting Network Element’s interface. CAUTION: Resetting interface will...
  • Page 668 SET-FECOM Page SET-FECOM parameter changed, reset will caused following nsus confirmation message will displayed: If Address following confirmation message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-fecom rtrv-map-neighbor rtrv-map-network Issue December 1997 11-251 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 669: Set-Lgn

    SET-LGN Page SET-LGN NAME set-lgn: Login INPUT FORMAT set-lgn[:act= Action ]; DESCRIPTION This command enters, edits, deletes logins passwords. Prior first this command, default logins LUC01, LUC02 and LUC03 The default password DDM-2000. NOTE Some situations (for example, software upgrade circuit pack installation)
  • Page 670 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN input parameters are: Action following values: Enter login password pair (default value). Login enter case-sensitive alphanumeric string consisting minimum five maximum alphabetic characters and/or numbers. When entering login, type user privileged user general user maintenance or reports-only must specified password...
  • Page 671 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN following screen shows dialog enter login: NOTE: Passwords will displayed when they entered. following screen shows dialog edit login: Issue December 1997 11-254 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 672 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN following screen shows dialog delete login: login value does match valid login definition (syntactically incorrect), following message will appear: user once again enter login. user enters login that does match valid login definition, following denial message will displayed: Issue December...
  • Page 673 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN entered password value does match valid password definition (syntactically incorrect), following message will appear: Entry does follow rules passwords. Passwords must characters, with least alphabetic characters additionally, least symbolic. Characters allowed are: A..Z a..z, 0..9, symbolic characters, EXCEPT following: semicolon...
  • Page 674 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN attempt made privileged user login, following message will keep displaying until valid user type (general, maintenance, reports-only) entered: When user selects edit or delete option login login entered does exist, following message will displayed: < > user invokes this command...
  • Page 675 SET-LGN Page SET-LGN user attempts enter another login when maximum supported logins already exists, following denial message will appear: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-lgn set-passwd set-secu Issue December 1997 11-258 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 676: Set-Link

    SET-LINK Page SET-LINK NAME set-link: Link Configuration INPUT FORMAT set-link:pg= pagelength ; DESCRIPTION This command sets configuration current user’s craft interface terminal (CIT) link. input parameter PageLength vertical size displayed page lines. value integer between with default page length zero, pager used system...

  • Page 677: Set-Ne

    SET-NE Page SET-NE NAME set-ne: Network Element INPUT FORMAT set-ne:tid= TID [,shelf= Shelf ][,cort= CO/RT ] [,idle= IdleChannelSignal ]; DESCRIPTION NOTE: This command page describes functionality set-ne command OC-12 Release later OC-12 TARP releases. This command sets network element (NE) characteristics (parameters) DDM-2000.
  • Page 678 SET-NE Page SET-NE Shelf numeric identification (1-8) system shelf arrangement site. same site must have unique Shelf settings. Shelf parameter used local interface identify which system connect CIT. default value CO/RT parameter (Central Office) (Remote cort Terminal) identifies system having characteristics values CO/RT...
  • Page 679 SET-NE Page SET-NE When this command entered, following confirmation message will displayed: Changing cort or shelf parameters will cause network element reset. Before these parameters changed, following caution message will displayed prior confirmation message: RELATED COMMANDS reset rlgn rtrv-ne rtrv-map-network Issue December 1997...

  • Page 680: Set-Oc3

    SET-OC3 Page SET-OC3 NAME set-oc3: OC-3 Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-oc3: Address [:dgr= SignalDegradeThreshold ] [,syncmsg= SynchronizationMessaging ][,app= Application ] [,aisalm= Alarm ]; DESCRIPTION This command sets several characteristics (parameters) specified OC-3 line line pair. OC-12 ring linear applications, address expressed line pair.
  • Page 681 SET-OC3 Page SET-OC3 When this option selected, interpretation both disabled bytes will disabled hence "Don’t Use" message will transmitted both bytes times. This parameter available linear systems only. concat ConcatenationMode provisions concatenation mode OC-3 line Application keyword that further characterizes behavior function unit...
  • Page 682 SET-OC3 Page SET-OC3 application parameter requires that cross-connection exist addressed function unit application type changed. port cross-connected, request will denied with following message: Application parameter used with AID = all more addresses cannot processed because existing cross connections, request will complete following message...
  • Page 683 SET-OC3 Page SET-OC3 This command will cause following confirmation request displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-oc3 rtrv-sync Issue December 1997 11-266 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 684: Set-Oc12

    SET-OC12 Page SET-OC12 NAME set-oc12: OC-12 Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-oc12: Address [:dgr= SignalDegrade ][,syncmsg= SynchronizationMessaging ] [,aisalm= Alarm ]; DESCRIPTION This command sets Signal Degrade (DGR) threshold, line alarm level byte message status specified OC-12 line pair. input parameters are: Address identifies OC-12...
  • Page 685 SET-OC12 Page SET-OC12 Critical alarm Major alarm Minor alarm alarmed, reported (default) attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: This command will cause following confirmation request displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-oc12 rtrv-sync Issue December...

  • Page 686: Set-Passwd

    SET-PASSWD Page SET-PASSWD NAME set-passwd: Password INPUT FORMAT set-passwd; DESCRIPTION This command changes user’s password. users change their passwords. Privileged users change other users’ passwords using set-lgn command. following screen shows dialog change password. dialog, user input shown bold type. NOTE: Passwords will...
  • Page 687 SET-PASSWD Page SET-PASSWD valid password case-sensitive ASCII string containing minimum maximum characters. password must also include least numeric characters symbolic (non-alphabetic non-numeric) character. following symbolic characters have special meanings either User Interface x.25 interface cannot included password: semicolon question mark sign space colon...
  • Page 688 SET-PASSWD Page SET-PASSWD user once again enter password. user tries again enter password that does match valid password definition, following denial message will displayed: user changing password password entered does match present valid password, will rejected user will prompted again. user allowed only...
  • Page 689 SET-PASSWD Page SET-PASSWD RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-lgn set-lgn set-secu Issue December 1997 11-272 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 690: Set-Pmthres-Line

    SET-PMTHRES-LINE Page SET-PMTHRES-LINE NAME set-pmthres-line: Performance Monitoring Threshold Line INPUT FORMAT set-pmthres-line: [QHB2CVOC12= nnnnn ][,DayB2CVOC12= nnnnnn ] [,QHB2CVOC3= nnnnn ][,DayB2CVOC3= nnnnnnn ] [,QHB2CVEC1= nnnn ][,DayB2CVEC1= nnnnn ] [,QHB2ES= nnn ][,DayB2ES= nnnnn ] [,QHB2ESA= nnn ][,DayB2ESA= nnnnn ] [,QHB2ESB= nnn ][,DayB2ESB= nnnnn ] [,QHB2SES= nn ][,DayB2SES= nnnn ] [,QHB2UAS= nn ][,DayB2UAS= nnnn ] [,QHPSCL= nn ][,DayPSCL= nn ];...
  • Page 691 SET-PMTHRES-LINE Page SET-PMTHRES-LINE threshold terms equivalent expressed logarithm base This parameter sets threshold OC-3 coding QHB2CVOC3 violations count quarter-hourly basis. This parameter range through corresponding BERs − 10 − 7 through integer range through 13841. default value 1384. negative value this parameter indicates...
  • Page 692 SET-PMTHRES-LINE Page SET-PMTHRES-LINE This parameter sets threshold count DayB2SES daily basis. This parameter integer with range through 4095 default value This parameter sets threshold count QHB2UAS quarter-hourly basis. This parameter integer with range through default value This parameter sets threshold count DayB2UAS daily...
  • Page 693 SET-PMTHRES-LINE Page SET-PMTHRES-LINE Line Errors Threshold Equivalent Min. Threshold Equivalent Threshold (QHB2CVEC1 DayB2CVEC1) 4613 442848 44285 4428 RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-line rtrv-pm-tca rtrv-pmthres-line set-pmthres-sect Issue December 1997 11-276 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 694: Set-Pmthres-Sect

    SET-PMTHRES-SECT Page SET-PMTHRES-SECT NAME set-pmthres-sect: Performance Monitoring Threshold Section INPUT FORMAT set-pmthres-sect:[TxPwr1dB= n ][,TxPwr2dB= n ][,LaserBias= n ] [,Qhsefs= nn ][,Daysefs= nnnn ]; DESCRIPTION This command sets performance-monitoring thresholds OC-12 OC-3 sections, well activating deactivating processing threshold crossings performance parameters. input parameters are:...
  • Page 695 SET-PMTHRES-SECT Page SET-PMTHRES-SECT RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-sect rtrv-pm-tca rtrv-pmthres-sect Issue December 1997 11-278 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 696: Set-Pmthres-Sts1

    SET-PMTHRES-STS1 Page SET-PMTHRES-STS1 NAME set-pmthres-sts1: Performance Monitoring Threshold STS-1 INPUT FORMAT set-pmthres-sts1:[QHB3CV= nnnn ][,DayB3CV= nnnnnn ][,QHB3ES= nnn ] [,DayB3ES= nnnnn ][,QHB3ESA= nnn ][,DayB3ESA= nnnnn ][,QHB3ESB= nnn ] [,DayB3ESB= nnnnn ][,QHB3SES= nn ][,DayB3SES= nnnn ][,QHB3UAS= nn ] [,DayB3UAS= nnnn ]; where nnn... numerical value given...
  • Page 697 SET-PMTHRES-STS1 Page SET-PMTHRES-STS1 This parameter sets threshold type errored seconds QHB3ESA quarter-hourly basis. type second with single error. This parameter integer range through default value This parameter sets threshold type errored seconds DayB3ESA daily basis. type second with single error. This parameter integer...
  • Page 698 SET-PMTHRES-STS1 Page SET-PMTHRES-STS1 following table shows error counts equivalent different thresholds. STS-1 Path Errors Threshold Equivalent Min. Threshold Equivalent Threshold (QHB3CV DayB3CV) 4510 432960 43296 4330 RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pmthres-sts1 rtrv-pm-sts1 rtrv-pm-tca Issue December 1997 11-281 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 699: Set-Pmthres-T3

    SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 NAME set-pmthres-t3: Performance Monitoring Threshold INPUT FORMAT set-pmthres-t3:[QHCVL= nnnnn ][,DayCVL= nnnnnnn ][,QHESL= nnn ] [,DayESL= nnnnn ][,QHSESL= nn ][,DaySESL= nnnn ][,QHSEFS= nn ] [,DaySEFS= nnnn ][,QHPCV= nnnnn ][,DayPCV= nnnnnnn ] [,QHFMCV= nnnnn ][,DayFMCV= nnnnnnn ][,QHCP= nnnnn ][,DayCP= nnnnnnn ] [,QHESP= nnn ][,DayESP= nnnnn ][,QHSESP= nn ][,DaySESP= nnnn ] [,QHUASP= nn ][,DayUASP= nnnn ][,QHSEFSFE= nn ][,DaySEFSFE= nnnn ] [,QHCPFE= nnnnn ][,DayCPFE= nnnnnnn ][,QHESPFE= nnn ][,DayESPFE= nnnnn ]...
  • Page 700 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 This parameter sets threshold coding violations count DayCVL daily basis line B3ZS data. negative value this parameter indicates that threshold specified terms equivalent expressed logarithm base This parameter range through corresponding BERs − 10 − 7 through integer range through...
  • Page 701 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 This parameter sets threshold coding violations count DayPCV daily basis type format. type selected pbit using command. This path parameter that set-t3 applies incoming signal from both DSX-3 fiber. negative value this parameter indicates that parity count threshold specified terms...
  • Page 702 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 parameter range through corresponding BERs − 10 − 7 through integer range through 1048575. default value 3820. This parameter sets threshold errored seconds count QHESP quarter-hourly basis pbit, fmbit and type cpbit formats. type selected using command. This set-t3 path...
  • Page 703 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 parameter integer range through with default value This parameter sets threshold severely errored frame DaySEFSFE seconds count daily basis far-end type cpbit format. type selected using command. This set-t3 parameter monitored reading received X-bits C-bit parity frame. This path parameter...
  • Page 704 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 from both DSX-3 fiber. This parameter integer range through with default value This parameter sets threshold severely errored DaySESPFE seconds count daily basis far-end type cpbit format. type selected using command. This set-t3 path parameter that applies incoming signal from...
  • Page 705 SET-PMTHRES-T3 Page SET-PMTHRES-T3 RELATED COMMANDS init-pm rtrv-pm-t3 rtrv-pm-tca rtrv-pmthres-t3 set-t3 Issue December 1997 11-288 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 706: Set-Secu

    SET-SECU Page SET-SECU NAME set-secu: Security INPUT FORMAT set-secu: Address [:sec= Security ][,to= Timeout ]; DESCRIPTION This command configures network element (NE) system security each interface. three default logins LUC01, LUC02 and (all upper-case LUC03 letters). default password Privileged users should change DDM-2000...
  • Page 707 SET-SECU Page SET-SECU Timeout specifies time, minutes, before inactive session automatically terminated. This value ranging from minutes default value minutes. Setting this parameter will disable timeout function. Execution this command affects subsequent attempts establish login sessions does affect currently active sessions.
  • Page 708 SET-SECU Page SET-SECU (enter upper layer section DCC) ent-ulsdcc (initialize performance-monitoring) init-pm (install program) ins-prog (reset system software) reset (set date) set-date (set network element) set-ne (enter message map) ent-tl1msgmap (set X.25 link) set-x25 (enter application context map) ent-osacmap (delete application context map)

  • Page 709: Set-State-Ec1

    SET-STATE-EC1 Page SET-STATE-EC1 NAME set-state-ec1: EC-1 Port State INPUT FORMAT set-state-ec1: Address :ps= PrimaryState ; DESCRIPTION This command sets state speed EC-1 ports. This command used turn monitoring signal failures from specified port. input parameters are: Address identifies EC-1 port(s). Address Valid Addresses:...
  • Page 710 SET-STATE-EC1 Page SET-STATE-EC1 this command entered with several addresses more these addresses properly equipped, following message will displayed: this command executed STS-1 cross-connection exists address entered, cross-connection must cross-connected OLIU. OLIU present, following denial message will displayed: following confirmation message will displayed after...

  • Page 711: Set-State-Oc3

    SET-STATE-OC3 Page SET-STATE-OC3 NAME set-state-oc3: OC-3 Line State INPUT FORMAT set-state-oc3: Address :ps= PrimaryState ; DESCRIPTION This command sets state more OC-3 lines. This command used turn monitoring signal failures from specified line. input parameters are: Address identifies OC-3 line(s). Address Valid addresses:...
  • Page 712 SET-STATE-OC3 Page SET-STATE-OC3 following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-state-eqpt rtrv-state-oc3 set-fecom Issue December 1997 11-295 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 713: Set-State-Sts1

    SET-STATE-STS1 Page SET-STATE-STS1 NAME set-state-sts1: State STS-1 Channels INPUT FORMAT set-state-sts1: Address :ps= PrimaryState ; DESCRIPTION This command sets states STS-1 channels. used turn monitoring signal failures maintenance signals specified channels. input parameters are: Address identifies STS-1 channel(s). Valid addresses are: Address shelf...
  • Page 714 SET-STATE-STS1 Page SET-STATE-STS1 primary state entered, following message will displayed: nmon path address specified command STS-1 channel that part STS-3c cross-connected channel, command will denied with following message: following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: attempt made execute this command when incompatible...
  • Page 715 SET-STATE-STS1 Page SET-STATE-STS1 RELATED COMMANDS ent-crs-sts1 dlt-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-state-sts1 Issue December 1997 11-298 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 716: Set-State-Sts3C

    SET-STATE-STS3c Page SET-STATE-STS3c NAME set-state-sts3c: State STS-3c Channels INPUT FORMAT set-state-sts3c: Address :ps= PrimaryState ; DESCRIPTION This command sets states STS-3c channels. used turn monitoring signal failures maintenance signals specified channels. This command available OC-12 ring releases. input parameters are: Address identifies STS-3c...
  • Page 717 SET-STATE-STS3c Page SET-STATE-STS3c primary state entered, following message will displayed: nmon path address specified command STS-1 cross-connected channel, video STS-3c cross-connected channel, command will denied with following message: following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-sts3c ent-crs-sts3c rtrv-crs-sts3c rtrv-state-sts3c update...

  • Page 718: Set-State-T3

    SET-STATE-T3 Page SET-STATE-T3 NAME set-state-t3: Port State INPUT FORMAT set-state-t3: Address :ps= PrimaryState ; DESCRIPTION This command sets state more ports. This command used turn alarm signal failures from specified port. input parameters are: Address identifies port(s). Address Valid Port Addresses: {a,b,c,d}-{1-3,all},all PrimaryState...
  • Page 719 SET-STATE-T3 Page SET-STATE-T3 following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-state rtrv-t3 Issue December 1997 11-302 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 720: Set-Sts1

    SET-STS1 Page SET-STS1 NAME set-sts1: STS-1 Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-sts1: Address :dgr= SignalDegrade [,nsa= Alarm ][,sa= Alarm ]; DESCRIPTION This command provisions following three types parameters STS-1 channels: Signal Degrade Alarm Threshold: This parameter only provisioned ring channels (for example, incoming STS-1 channels...
  • Page 721 SET-STS1 Page SET-STS1 This parameter provisioned alarm level service affecting STS-1 path following values: Critical alarm (default ring channels) Minor alarm (non-ring channels only, default) alarmed, reported alarmed reported (non-ring channels only) signal degrade parameter entered address used value other than "all"...
  • Page 722 SET-STS1 Page SET-STS1 attempt made execute this command, when incompatible OLIU packs exists Main, request will denied with following message: OC-12 ring releases, following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: < > < > < > NOTE: STS-1 address provisioned, this command...

  • Page 723: Set-Sts3C

    SET-STS3c Page SET-STS3c NAME set-sts3c: STS-3c Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-sts3c: Address :dgr= SignalDegrage [,nsa= Alarm ][,sa= Alarm ]; DESCRIPTION This command provisions signal degrade alarm threshold dropped non- terminated STS-3c channels from high-speed ring channels. command also provisions alarm level STS-3c path condition...
  • Page 724 SET-STS3c Page SET-STS3c signal degrade parameter entered address used value other than command will denied with following message: Before provisioning STS-3c paramete, DDM-2000 must have STS-3c cross-connection channel state specified address. cross-connection channel state exists, command will execute following message will displayed: command...
  • Page 725 SET-STS3c Page SET-STS3c following confirmation message will displayed after command entry: < > < > < > RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-sts3c Issue December 1997 11-308 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 726: Set-Sync

    SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC NAME set-sync: Synchronization Characteristics DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command provisions synchronization mode switching, synchronization source, output mode timing signals when (BBF4) circuit pack hardware provisioned externally timed, internally timed, line timed. Beginning with DDM-2000 OC-12 Release...
  • Page 727 SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC INPUT FORMAT following parameters available this command when provisioned specific synchronization reference. Parameters vary depending upon whether application linear rings. RING SYSTEMS LINE TIMED set-sync:[mdsw= ModeSwitching ][,src= SynchronizationSource ] [,auto= SyncAutoreconfiguration (BBF2 BBF2B pack type) set-sync:[mdsw= ModeSwitching ][,src= SynchronizationSource ] [aisthres= AISThreshold ][,auto= SyncAutoreconfiguration ];...
  • Page 728 SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC SynchronizationSource. This parameter selects line from which shelf line timing and/or synchronization output will derived. ring releases, BBF2 BBF2B BBF4 circuit packs used. This parameter have following values: ring releases (default). main-b-1 ring releases. main-b-2 aisthres AISThreshold. applicable BBF2B BBF4...
  • Page 729 SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC command manually switch other timing switch-sync source. SyncAutoreconfiguration active. enabled SyncAutoreconfiguration active (default). disabled hardware provisioning switches FreeRunning timing mode, execution this command will denied with following message: When sync messages active set-oc3 and/or set-oc12 commands) user requests timing source...
  • Page 730 SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC SyncAutoreconfiguration, several other parameters must before this feature enabled. these parameters set, SyncAutoreconfiguration request will denied with following message: <message reason> Valid message reasons include following: byte messages disabled Sync messages disabled. Shelf line timed attempt made execute this command...
  • Page 731 SET-SYNC Page SET-SYNC RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-sync set-oc3 set-oc12 switch-sync Issue December 1997 11-314 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 732: Set-T3

    SET-T3 Page SET-T3 NAME set-t3: Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-t3: Address :[md= Mode ][,ais= AlarmIndicationSignal ][,alm= AlarmLevel ] [,fth= FailureThreshold ][,pmmd= PMMode ][,frame= Frame ][,fmt= Format ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command sets characteristic parameters more ports. These characteristics include...
  • Page 733 SET-T3 Page SET-T3 — inserted towards fiber upon detection incoming from DSX-3. NOTE: always inserted violation monitor removal mode provisioned vmr or vm. NOTE: If md value vmr or vm always defaults off value. AlarmLevel sets alarm level incoming Signal Failure following: Critical...
  • Page 734 SET-T3 Page SET-T3 incoming signal from both fiber dsx-3 cbit C-bit framing type. Format supports PMMode Frame parameters sets type PMON that will appear report. This parameter will appear only vmr or vm mode already been selected. mode selected, these parameters will visible...
  • Page 735 SET-T3 Page SET-T3 frame format options have both been selected, cpbit following denial message will displayed: < > following confirmation message will displayed after command entry when addressing group packs using address: multiple addresses specified, following caution message will printed immediately before confirmation...

  • Page 736: Set-Trace-Sts1

    SET-TRACE-STS1 Page SET-TRACE-STS1 NAME set-trace-sts1: Path Trace Characteristics INPUT FORMAT set-trace-sts1: Address [:EXPTRC=Expectedincomingpathtrace] [,TRC=OutgoingPathTrace]; DESCRIPTION This command assigns user-selectable alphanumeric character strings transmit receive path trace fields cross-connected STS-1 signal. allowed ASCII characters include letters "A" through "Z" "a" through "z", numbers "0"...
  • Page 737 SET-TRACE-STS1 Page SET-TRACE-STS1 channel cross-connected STS-1 PTE, request will denied with following message: STS-1 channel which this command issued available, request will denied with following message: attempt made path trace path other than terminated 3DS3 (BBG11B) circuit pack, request will denied with following...
  • Page 738 SET-TRACE-STS1 Page SET-TRACE-STS1 When input, this command will cause following confirmation request displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-trace-sts1 rtrv-crs-sts1 set-sts1 Issue December 1997 11-321 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 739: Set-X25

    SET-X25 Page SET-X25 NAME set-x25: X.25 Link INPUT FORMAT set-x25:PKT= pkt ; DESCRIPTION This command sets packet size X.25 link. packet size either 256. CAUTION: Execution this command affect communication will reset X.25 link. Also, this command will cause active logins automatically dropped.
  • Page 740 SET-X25 Page SET-X25 When this command entered, following confirmation message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-x25 Issue December 1997 11-323 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 741: Switch-Fn

    SWITCH-FN Page SWITCH-FN NAME switch-fn: Protection Switch Function Unit INPUT FORMAT switch-fn: Address :pri= Priority ; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command controls operation function unit circuit pack protection switching when equipped with termination packs such 3STS1E, 3DS3 circuit packs.
  • Page 742 SWITCH-FN Page SWITCH-FN After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: this command executed with priority inhibit or forced then automatic protection switching will disabled until this command executed again with priority reset. RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-state switch-line Issue December 1997 11-325 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 743: Path Switching

    SWITCH-PATH-STS1 Page SWITCH-PATH-STS1 NAME switch-path-sts1: Switch Path STS-1 INPUT FORMAT switch-path-sts1: Address :pri= Priority ; DESCRIPTION This command controls STS-1 path switching path protected ring configurations. Path switching always unidirectional (one-way). input parameters are: Address address STS-1 channel currently carrying Address dropped drop...
  • Page 744 SWITCH-PATH-STS1 Page SWITCH-PATH-STS1 addressed path associated with connection type pass-through ring dual locked command will denied with following message: NOTE: pass-through path passes directly from OC-N receiver OC-N transmitter. service carried with this path dropped this node. equal higher priority switch already exists...
  • Page 745 SWITCH-PATH-STS1 Page SWITCH-PATH-STS1 If -all appears address equal higher priority switch already exists some addressed paths path part STS-3c cross- connected channel, command will already exists some addressed paths, command will list these exceptions follows: sts1 address sts1 address If -all appears address path...
  • Page 746 SWITCH-PATH-STS1 Page SWITCH-PATH-STS1 After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-vt1 rtrv-state-eqpt rtrv-state-path Issue December 1997 11-329 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 747 SWITCH-PATH-STS3c Page SWITCH-PATH-STS3c NAME switch-path-sts3c: Switch Path STS3c INPUT FORMAT switch-path-sts3c: Address :pri= Priority ; DESCRIPTION This command controls STS-3c path switching path protected ring configurations. Path switching always unidirectional (one-way). This command available with OC-12 Release later ring releases. input parameters are:...
  • Page 748 SWITCH-PATH-STS3c Page SWITCH-PATH-STS3c path address specified command dropped path application function unit, command will denied with following message: path address specified command STS-1 cross-connected channel, command will denied with following message: path address specified command pass-through path, command will denied with following message:...
  • Page 749 SWITCH-PATH-STS3c Page SWITCH-PATH-STS3c If -all appears address equal higher priority switch already exists some addressed paths, some paths STS-1 cross- connected channels, command will list these exceptions. sts3c address sts3c address If -all appears address path equipped, cross- connected, pass-through connection, path will...
  • Page 750 SWITCH-PATH-STS3c Page SWITCH-PATH-STS3c After entering this command following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-crs-sts3c rtrv-state-eqpt rtrv-state-path Issue December 1997 11-333 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 751 SWITCH-SYNC Page SWITCH-SYNC NAME switch-sync: Protection Switch Synchronization INPUT FORMAT switch-sync:s= SyncFunction ,pri= Priority ; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command controls operation synchronization protection switching. This command lets user control which synchronization reference used enables user switch synchronization reference...
  • Page 752 SWITCH-SYNC Page SWITCH-SYNC SyncFunction value priority values are: mode Clear active manual switch. This will allow reset system switch back External or LineTimed system provisioned non-revertive mode switching been manually switched holdover mode. Switch from provisioned timing mode, manual External or LineTimed holdover mode.
  • Page 753 SWITCH-SYNC Page SWITCH-SYNC SyncFunction priority reset or inhibit entered, request will denied with following denial messages: switch request issued SyncFunction value src and SyncAutoreconfiguration enabled, command will denied with following message: reference switching (reset, inhibit, manual) applies only references. command will executed entered...
  • Page 754 SWITCH-SYNC Page SWITCH-SYNC this command entered both timing slots empty, command will denied following denial message will displayed: After entering this command, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS rtrv-state-eqpt rtrv-sync set-sync Issue December 1997 11-337 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 755 TEST-ALM Page TEST-ALM NAME test-alm: Test Office Alarms INPUT FORMAT test-alm:[md= Mode ][,r= Repeat ]; DESCRIPTION This command tests audible visible office alarms associated user panel LEDs. specific office alarm test turns specific alarm seconds turns seconds, after which office alarm reverts normal...
  • Page 756 TEST-ALM Page TEST-ALM This command aborted pressing "CANcel" "DELete" while command progress. following denial message will output test cannot performed other activity system: Issue December 1997 11-339 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 757 TEST-LED Page TEST-LED NAME test-led: Test Indicators INPUT FORMAT test-led:[ Address ]:[r= Repeat ]; DESCRIPTION This command activates circuit pack user panel LEDs seconds then seconds off, after which reverts normal operation. This command does affect office alarms. This test also done pressing...
  • Page 758 TEST-SYSCTL Page TEST-SYSCTL NAME test-sysctl: Test System Controllers INPUT FORMAT test-sysctl; DESCRIPTION This command causes entire control system (system controller overhead controller perform self-test. this command entered while transmission test progress, following denial message test-trmsn-t3 will displayed: test, following messages will displayed.
  • Page 759 TEST-SYSCTL Page TEST-SYSCTL test fails, following messages displayed, indicating that both controller circuit packs have failed: addition failure message, Fault failed circuit pack(s) Major alarm user panel will illuminated, office alarm will activated. Issue December 1997 11-342 DDM-2000 OC-12...

  • Page 760: Mux Direction

    TEST-TRMSN-T3 Page TEST-TRMSN-T3 NAME test-trmsn-t3: Test Transmission INPUT FORMAT test-trmsn-t3: Address :[dirn= Direction ][,dur= Duration ]; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command will affect service. This command causes insertion test signal selected channel DEMUX direction will affect service selected channel. This command sets automated...
  • Page 761 TEST-TRMSN-T3 Page TEST-TRMSN-T3 input parameters are: Address port. Address Valid Port Addresses: {a,b,c,d}-{1-3} Direction transmission test. This parameter following dirn values: test signal inserted direction received signal monitored from direction (default) shown Figure 11-3. test signal inserted DEMUX direction demux received signal monitored...
  • Page 762 TEST-TRMSN-T3 Page TEST-TRMSN-T3 NEAR END Multiplexing Direction Loop Internal Monitor Test Signal Demultiplexing Direction Figure 11-4. Automated Transmission Test Signal DEMUX Direction This command displays following output report: Issue December 1997 11-345 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 763 TEST-TRMSN-T3 Page TEST-TRMSN-T3 output parameters are: address port Port direction transmission test Direction duration test minutes Duration Elapsed time test seconds Elapsed Time Total number errored seconds. Errored Seconds question mark rightmost character column Errored Seconds indicates uncertain data because protection switch during...
  • Page 764 TEST-TRMSN-T3 Page TEST-TRMSN-T3 following denial message will output test cannot performed other activity system: When this command entered, following confirmation message displayed: RELATED COMMANDS opr-lpbk-t3 rls-lpbk-t3 rtrv-pm-t3 Issue December 1997 11-347 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 765 TOGGLE (Ctl-T) Page TOGGLE (Ctl-T) NAME toggle: Toggle Between Local Remote Sessions INPUT FORMAT (Press t " " while holding key) CTRL DESCRIPTION This command toggles user between local remote sessions. provides quick easy switch from local session remote session, while terminating either...
  • Page 766 TOGGLE (Ctl-T) Page TOGGLE (Ctl-T) RELATED COMMANDS logout rlgn Issue December 1997 11-349 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 767 Page NAME upd: Update Equipment List INPUT FORMAT upd; DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Execution this command affect service. This command updates system data base recorded nonvolatile memory) reflect existing hardware configuration incoming signals. This command executed either pushing Update/Initialize button, located SYSCTL circuit pack entering...
  • Page 768 Page Removing STS1 VT1.5 alarm incoming channels. Changing switch setting circuit pack — command should activated following switch setting changes OLIU, BBF2/BBF2B circuit packs. This command enters settings into system. Failure update will cause "unexpected switches" "unexpected type" alarm, since switch settings agree...
  • Page 769 Page ALARM RESTRICTIONS Pressing button issuing command will not change update provisioning following alarms exist. user will have correct alarmed condition before executing this command. These alarms are: illegal type allowed reason) invalid switches. SYSTEM RESTRICTIONS CORRECTIVE ACTIONS Pressing button issuing command will...
  • Page 770 Page 1+1, slot pairs, circuit pack pair removed long other remains support cross-connection. rings systems, MAIN-B circuit packs special cross-connections system must deleted before addressed circuit pack removed. Upgrades from Slot Upgrades from Slot pair permitted when Slot equipped. Corrective Action: documented upgrade...
  • Page 771 Page protection switch request forced, inhibit or specified lockout slot that empty, entering command cause protection switch occur possibly affecting service. When this occurs, following confirmation message will displayed: RELATED COMMANDS dlt-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-sts1 rtrv-crs-vt1 rtrv-state-eqpt rtrv-state-path Issue December 1997 11-354 DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 772 DETAILED REPORTS DETAILED REPORTS Detailed Alarm History Reports This section provides details Retrieve Alarm Retrieve History commands with explanations specific output messages. Each command includes INPUT FORMAT part, providing syntax command, DESCRIPTION part, providing details command input output parameters. Following DESCRIPTION part table...
  • Page 773 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description NAME rtrv-alm: Retrieve Alarm Status INPUT FORMAT rtrv-alm[:alm= AlarmLevel ]; DESCRIPTION This command displays report active alarm status conditions local network element. report includes source address alarm, well date time alarm, whether condition service affecting, short...
  • Page 774 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Example Alarm Report: output parameters are: Alarm level alarm status condition being reported. Alarm Level status condition named status there user panel illuminated that condition. alarm condition name topmost user panel that illuminated following conditions: CRITICAL...
  • Page 775 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Month (MM) (DD) event. Date Detected Time (Hours, Minute, Seconds) event occurrence. Time Detected indicates whether condition service affecting not, have following values: Service affecting service affecting applicable this condition (not service affecting). Table 11-3 lists...
  • Page 776 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions Description Meaning BBF6 (T1EXT) circuit pack requires both function reqd eqpt unit slots group equipped. second circuit pack same type should inserted empty function unit slot. − A − volt power feeder...
  • Page 777 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning previously installed this system removed. removed should replaced, "update" should done remove from system equipment list. loopback (toward optical fiber) active loopback Fiber) specified port. opr-lpbk-t3 and rls-lpbk-t3 commands.
  • Page 778 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system been holdover mode more than excessive holdover hours. This cause degraded performance (high error rates) transmitted and/or received signals. Whenever this condition exists, condition " "...
  • Page 779 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system holdover synchronization mode. holdover mode active Likely causes: system manually switched holdover mode (with command, switch-sync central office system, with TBOS control point) switch been reset system automatically...
  • Page 780 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning alarm indication signal (AIS) being received from inc. sync. ref. synchronization reference signal. Likely causes: Failure upstream equipment facility (towards DSX-1). error ratio (BER) synchronization inc. sync.

  • Page 781: Demux Direction

    RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning incoming synchronization reference signal inc. sync. ref. lock (OOL). frequency clock providing reference signal specification. Likely causes: Failure office timing supply that provides timing reference. system detected alarm indication...

  • Page 782: Threshold Sts-1

    RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected loss-of-frame (LOF) inc. condition incoming EC-1 signal. defined out-of-frame (OOF) condition (five consecutive errored STS-1 framing patterns) that lasts least milliseconds. Likely causes: Failure STS1E 3STS1E equivalent...
  • Page 783 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected loss-of-frame (LOF) inc. OC12 condition incoming OC-12 signal. defined out-of-frame (OOF) condition (four consecutive errored STS-1 framing patterns) that lasts least milliseconds. Likely causes: Failure OLIU near...
  • Page 784 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning system detected loss-of-frame (LOF) inc. condition incoming OC-3 signal. defined out-of-frame (OOF) condition (five consecutive errored STS-1 framing patterns) that lasts least milliseconds. Likely causes: Failure OLIU near end,...
  • Page 785 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning error ratio (BER) received OC-3 signal inc. sig. failed (BER) − 3 exceeds Likely causes: Failure OLIU near end, failure receive fiber, failure OLIU end. system detected incoming STS-1...
  • Page 786 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning STS-1 path switched ring applications, error inc. STS1 sig. degrade (BER) ratio (BER) specified STS-1 signal exceeds user-provisioned signal degrade threshold. Likely causes: Failure fiber failure OLIU circuit pack...
  • Page 787 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning When associated with OC-3 OC-12 line, this inhibit switch message means that identified line selected active receiving line, protection switch make this active receiving line will done.
  • Page 788 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning synchronization mode been manually switched manual sync. mode switch holdover free-running will remain that mode until switch request reset. switch-sync command. Internal equipment failure OHCTL OHCTL failed Internal equipment...
  • Page 789 RTRV-ALM Page RTRV-ALM Report Description Report Description Table 11-3. RTRV-ALM Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning Internal equipment failure failed circuit pack been installed into MAIN-A slot. unexpected present circuit pack should removed from shelf. When associated with SYSCTL OHCTL slot, this unexpected switches message...
  • Page 790 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY NAME rtrv-hsty:Retrieve History INPUT FORMAT rtrv-hsty; DESCRIPTION This command displays event-history report. This report contains list most recent system events. This report contains events. events listed last-in, first-out order date- time-stamped. output report appears follows: output parameters are: Month (MM)
  • Page 791 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY alarm level following: Critical Alarm CRITICAL Major Alarm MAJOR Minor Alarm MINOR Power Minor Alarm MINOR Abnormal condition abnormal Near-End Activity ne-acty Status condition status — active alarm status condition system. source event. event source Source entire system slot, channel,...
  • Page 792 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions Description Meaning failed volt power feeder failed fuse -48V power/fuse good user panel been repaired. circuit pack been removed from specified slot. removed failure specified circuit pack cleared. 3DS3 good circuit pack inserted into shelf.
  • Page 793 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning craft interface terminal been disconnected. disconnect Starting with OC-12 Release later TARP dlt-ulsdcc compl. releases, this event will indicate deletion provisionable parameters Layer (that deletion TARP Adjacent from Manual Adjacency list, deletion TARP...
  • Page 794 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning out-of-frame (OOF) condition DEMUX inc. (from fiber) clrd direction (coming from fiber) cleared. system longer detecting EC-1 inc. FERF clrd receive signal failure (FERF) signal. failure EC-1 signal been cleared. inc.
  • Page 795 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning failure specified OC-3 signal cleared. OC-3 inc. sig. degrade clrd line and/or OC-3 line FERF conditions still present specified OC-3 line. OC-3 condition still present more STS-1 signals OC-3 line. system longer detecting...
  • Page 796 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning Equipment switching ring application occurred main-{1,2} protection switch equipment failure. internal equipment failure OHCTL circuit pack OHCTL good cleared. failure specified circuit pack cleared. OLIU good circuit pack inserted into shelf.
  • Page 797 RTRV-HSTY Page RTRV-HSTY Table 11-4. RTRV-HSTY Descriptions (Contd) Description Meaning read failure cross-connection data base occurred during sysctl recovered restart, backup copy recovered being used. read failure cross-connection data base occurred during sysctl initialized restart, recovery using backup copies also failed.
  • Page 798 A SONET Overview Table of Contents Overview History Basic Purpose Technical Overview SONET Signal Hierarchy SONET Layers SONET Frame Structure Section Overhead Line Overhead Path Overhead STS-1 Path Overhead VT Path Overhead SONET Multiplexing Procedure A-10 SONET Demultiplexing Procedure A-12 SONET Digital Multiplexing Schemes A-14 Asynchronous Multiplexing...

  • Page 799: Overview

    A SONET Overview Overview This section briefly describes the Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). History In the early 1980's, the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) recognized the need for an optical signal standard for future broadband transmission. The ANSI T1X1 subcommittee began working on optical signal and interface standards in 1984.

  • Page 800: A Sonet Overview

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview Basic Purpose The basic purpose of SONET is to provide a standard synchronous optical hierarchy with sufficient flexibility to accommodate digital signals that currently exist in today's network as well as those planned for the future. SONET currently defines standard rates and formats and optical interfaces.
  • Page 801 363-206-295 A SONET Overview The STS-1 frame is transmitted serially starting from the left with row 1 column 1 on through column 90, then row 2 column 1 through 90, continuing on, row-by- row, until all 810 bytes (9 X 90) of the STS-1 frame have been transmitted. Since each STS-1 frame consists of 810 bytes and each byte has 8 bits, the frame contains 6480 bits a frame.

  • Page 802: Sonet Layers

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview SONET Layers SONET divides its processing functions into three layers. These three layers are associated with equipment that reflects the natural divisions in network spans. Figure A-2 shows these defined layers in a signal path. They include: SECTION and Section Terminating Equipment - the transmission spans between lightwave terminating equipment and the regenerators.

  • Page 803: Sonet Frame Format

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview Each SONET layer has a set of overhead bytes as shown in Figure A-3. These bytes carry information used by various network elements. Section Overhead contains information that is used by all SONET equipment including repeaters. Line Overhead is used by all SONET equipment except repeaters.

  • Page 804: Sonet Frame Structure

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview SONET Frame Structure The following pages provide more detailed information on the function of various overhead bytes for each SONET layer. Section Overhead Framing (A1, A2) — Provides framing for each STS-1. STS-1 ID (J0) — Provides the order of appearance in a byte-interleaved STS- N frame;...

  • Page 805: Line Overhead

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview Line Overhead Line Pointer (H1, H2) — Two bytes indicate the offset in bytes between the pointer action byte (H3) and the first byte (J1) of the STS-1 synchronous payload envelope (SPE). Pointer Action (H3) — One byte is allocated for frequency justification. Line Bit-Interleaved Parity (BIP-8) (B2) —...

  • Page 806: Path Overhead

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview Path Overhead There are two types of path overheads: — STS-1 path overhead — VT path overhead. STS-1 Path Overhead The STS-1 path overhead is assigned to and remains with the STS-1 SPE until the payload is extracted and is used for functions that are necessary to transport all synchronous payload envelopes.

  • Page 807: Vt Path Overhead Byte

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview VT Path Overhead There is one byte of VT path overhead called V5. It occurs on every fourth frame; that is, 2000 times a second. This byte provides for VT paths the same functions that B3, C2, and G1 provide for STS paths, namely: Error checking Signal label...

  • Page 808: Sonet Multiplexing Procedure

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview SONET Multiplexing Procedure SONET has provisions for multiplexing asynchronous DS1s, synchronous DS1s, and asynchronous DS3s. Refer to Figure A-5 and Figure A-6. The first stage in multiplexing is mapping the input DS1 or DS3 tributary. In the case of DS1 inputs, three time slots (DS0s) are added to the incoming signal thus becoming a VT1.5.

  • Page 809: Sonet Multiplexing Procedure

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview DS3 to STS-1 Multiplexer Maps 1 DS3 into STS-1 SPE Adds STS-1 Path OH (Nine Time Slots) Builds STS-1 STS-1 to OC-3 Frame Multiplexer STS-1 #3 DS1 to VTG Multiplexer Byte-Interleaves VTG to STS-1 3 STS-1s into Multiplexer STS-1 #2 a STS-3...

  • Page 810: Sonet Demultiplexing Procedure

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview SONET Demultiplexing Procedure As shown in Figure A-6, demultiplexing is the inverse of multiplexing. The unscrambled STS-1 signal from the optical conversion stages is processed to extract the section and line overhead and accurately locate the SPE. The next stage processes the path overhead and demultiplexes the VTs.

  • Page 811: Sts-1 Synchronous Payload Envelope In Interior Of Sts-1 Frame

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview Two key points should be noted at this time. First, the SONET frame is a fixed time (125 µs) and no bit-stuffing is used. Second, as shown in Figure A-7, the synchronous payload envelope can float within the frame using byte-stuffing. This is to permit compensation for small variations in frequency between the clocks of the two systems that may occur if the systems are independently timed (plesiochronous timing).

  • Page 812: Asynchronous Multiplexing

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview SONET Digital Multiplexing Schemes Asynchronous Multiplexing Currently, fiber optic facilities are primarily used to carry DS3 signals. The DS3 signal consists of a combination of the following payload signals: 28 DS1s 14 DS1Cs 7 DS2s. Typically, 28 DS1 signals are multiplexed into a DS3 signal, using an M13 format. Refer to Figure A-8.

  • Page 813: Synchronous Multiplexing

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview Synchronous Multiplexing SONET's method of byte-interleaving DS1s to a higher signal rate permits economical extraction of a single DS1 without the need to demultiplex the entire STS-1 SPE. In addition, SONET provides overhead channels for use by OAM&P groups.

  • Page 814: Concatenated Mode

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview Concatenated Mode For services requiring multiples of the STS-1 rate, STS-1 path payloads may be shared to create a single broadband payload called a concatenated STS- N c (OC- N c). STS-1 signals are mapped into an STS- N c SPE and transported as a concatenated STS- N c signal.

  • Page 815: Sonet Interface

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview SONET Interface The SONET interface (Figure A-11) provides the optical midspan meet between SONET network elements. A SONET network element is the hardware and software that processes one or more layers of the SONET signal. SONET Interface SONET SONET Network...

  • Page 816: Sonet Payloads

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview SONET Payloads Table A-1 shows the digital signals that can be transported as SONET payloads. Table A-1. SONET Payloads Input Equivalent Tributary Channels Rate SONET Signal Rate 24 DS0s 1.544 Mb/s VT1.5 1.728 Mb/s E1 (CEPT) 32 DS0s 2.048 Mb/s 2.304 Mb/s...

  • Page 817: Higher Rate Transport

    363-206-295 A SONET Overview Higher Rate Transport Higher rate SONET signals are created by byte-interleaving N STS-1 to form an STS- N signal. The STS- N is then scrambled and converted to an optical carrier - level N (OC- N ) signal. The OC- N has a line rate of exactly N times the OC-1 signal (see Table A-2).
  • Page 818 363-206-295 A SONET Overview REFERENCES ANSI T1.106-1988 •American National Standard for Telecommunications - Digital Hierarchy Optical Interface Specifications, Single Mode,• and ANSI T1.105-1991 •American National Standard for Telecommunications - Digital Hierarchy Optical Rates and Formats Specification.• CCITT Recommendations G.707, G.708, G.709. R.
  • Page 819 Glossary See Ring (0x1) Low Speed Interface. The 1+1 protection switching architecture protects against failures of the optical transmit/ receive equipment and their connecting fiber facility. One bidirectional interface (two fibers plus associated OLIUs on each end) is designated "service," and the other is designated "protection."...
  • Page 820 Auxiliary Control — The name of the slot to the left of the SYSCTL slot on the DDM-2000 OC-3 and FiberReach wideband shelves and to the right of the SYSCTL slot on the DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf. Available Time In performance monitoring, the 1-second intervals.
  • Page 821 363-206-295 Glossary B3ZS Bipolar 3-Zero Substitution — A line coding method that replaces a string of three zeros with a sequence of symbols having some special characteristic. B8ZS Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution — A line coding method that replaces a string of eight zeros with a sequence of symbols having some special characteristic.
  • Page 822 363-206-295 Glossary CD-ROM Compact Disk, Read Only Memory CDTU Channel and Drop Test Unit Channel A logical signal within a port. For example, for an EC-1 port, there is one STS-1 channel and sometimes 28 VT1.5 channels. See Port. Channel State Provisioning A feature that allows a user to suppress reporting of alarms and events during provisioning by supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service and not monitored) for VT1.5 and STS-1 channels.
  • Page 823 363-206-295 Glossary CS&O Customer Support and Operations Coding Violation (a performance-monitoring parameter) CVFE Coding Violation Far-End — An indication returned to the transmitting terminal that an errored block has been detected at the receiving terminal. DACS III-2000 Digital Access and Cross-Connect System that provides clear channel switching at either the DS3 or the STS-1 rates, eliminating the need for manual DSXs.
  • Page 824 363-206-295 Glossary DEMUX Demultiplexer - "the DEMUX direction" is from the fiber toward the DSX. Digital Multiplexer Equipment that combines by time-division multiplexing several digital signals into a single composite digital signal. Digital Loop Carrier DPLL Digital Phase-Locked Loop Dual Ring Interworking. Two ring networks interconnected at two common nodes. Drop and Continue A technique that allows redundant signal appearances at two central offices in a DRI network, allowing protection against central office failures.
  • Page 825 363-206-295 Glossary Dual 0x1 Cross-Connection In a single-homed application, the DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer uses a dual 0x1 cross-connection to map the VT1.5 channels between the DDM-2000 FiberReach OC-1 and the DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 rings. This dual 0x1 architecture means that the VT1.5 path switching is only in the DDM-2000 FiberReach and not in the host DDM-2000.
  • Page 826 363-206-295 Glossary Errored Seconds — A performance monitoring parameter. ES "type A" is a second with exactly one error; ES "type B" is a second with more than one and less than the number of errors in a severely errored second for the given signal. ES by itself means the sum of the type A and type B ESs.
  • Page 827 Refers to any one of a number of different circuit packs that can reside in the A, B, or C function unit slots on the DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer, or in the A, B, C, or D function unit slots of the DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. GCNS-2000 Lucent's Gigabit Cell Network Switch.
  • Page 828 363-206-295 Glossary IAO LAN IntrAOffice Local Area Network Internal Clock. Used in synchronization messaging. Identifier. See shelf ID and site ID. International Electrotechnology Commission Infant Mortality Factor Incoming Status Input/Output Internet Protocol Intermediate Reach. A term used to describe distances of from 15 to 40 km between optical transmitter and receiver without regeneration.
  • Page 829 363-206-295 Glossary Jitter Timing jitter is defined as short-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their ideal positions in time. Local Area Network LAPD Link Access Procedure "D" Line Build Out — An equalizer network between the DDM-2000 OC-3 and OC-12 Multiplexers and the DSX panel.
  • Page 830 363-206-295 Glossary Loop Timing Loop timing is a special case of line timing. It applies to NEs that have only one OC-N interface. For example, terminating nodes in a linear network are loop timed. See Line Timing. Loss of Pointer — A failure to extract good data from an STS-1 payload. Loss of Signal —...
  • Page 831 363-206-295 Glossary Multiplexing The process of combining several distinct digital signals into a single composite digital signal. Mult Multipling. The cascading of signals in a bay. In the MULT mode, the DS1 external reference can be cascaded to other shelves in a bay using Mult cables. Normally starting with the bottom shelf (Number 1) and working towards the top of the bay.
  • Page 832 363-206-295 Glossary Non-Revertive A protection switching mode in which, after a protection switch occurs, the equipment remains in its current configuration after any failure conditions that caused a protection switch to occur clear or after any external switch commands are reset. (See Revertive.) Nonreturn to Zero Not Service Affecting NSAP...
  • Page 833 363-206-295 Glossary Operations Interface Any interface that provides information on the system performance or control. These include the equipment LEDs, user panel, CIT, office alarms, and all telemetry interfaces. OPS/INE Operations System/Intelligent Network Element Operations System — A central computer-based system used to provide operations, administration, and maintenance functions.
  • Page 834 363-206-295 Glossary Plesiochronous Network A network that contains multiple maintenance subnetworks, each internally synchronous and all operating at the same nominal frequency, but whose timing may be slightly different at any particular instant. For example in SONET networks, each timing traceable to their own Stratum 1 clock are considered plesiochronous with respect to each other.
  • Page 835 363-206-295 Glossary Product Family 2000 Lucent's line of SONET standard network products providing total network solutions. Primary Reference Source Power Supply Unit Permanent Virtual Circuit Power Random Access Memory Reactive Maintenance Refers to detecting defects/failures and clearing them. Remote See Far-End (FE) Revertive A protection switching mode in which, after a protection switch occurs, the equipment returns to the nominal configuration (that is, the service equipment is active, and the...
  • Page 836 363-206-295 Glossary RTAC Lucent Regional Technical Assistance Center (1-800-225-RTAC) Return to Zero Service Affecting SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Signal Degrade Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Self-Healing Ring architecture in which two or more fibers are used to provide route diversity. Node failures only affect traffic dropped at the failed node.
  • Page 837 363-206-295 Glossary Single 0x1 Cross-Connection In a dual-homed application, the DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer uses a single 0x1 cross-connection to map the VT1.5 channels between the DDM-2000 FiberReach OC-1 and the DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 rings. This single 0x1 architecture maps low speed to high speed on a specified ring rotation.
  • Page 838 363-206-295 Glossary STS-1 SPE STS-1 Synchronous Payload Envelope — A 125-microsecond frame structure composed of STS path overhead and the STS-1 payload. STS-3c Synchronous Transport Level 3 Concatenated Signal. See OC-3c. Subnetwork Group of SONET network elements that share a SONET data communications channel. Synchronization Messaging SONET synchronization messaging is used to communicate the quality of network timing, internal timing status, and timing states throughout a subnetwork.
  • Page 839 363-206-295 Glossary Transaction Language 1 — A Bellcore machine-to-machine communications language that is a subset of ITU-TSS, formerly CCITT's, human-machine language. Timing Looped Back. Used in synchronization messaging. Task Oriented Practice Bellcore Technical Requirement Time Slot Assignment Time Slot Interchange Technical Support Organization —...
  • Page 840 363-206-295 Glossary Voice Frequency VLSI Very Large Scale Integration — Refers to very complex state of the art integrated circuits. Violation Monitor — A mode of the DS3 circuit pack in which it will monitor but not remove P-bit parity violations on the DS3 signal received from the fiber. Violation, Monitor, and Removal —...
  • Page 841 Index Backup and Restoral, 8-6 Baffle, 3-7 Brownout Protection, 7-9 Numerics Brownout Protection, BBG8 SYSCTL, 1-7 177B Apparatus Blank, 7-76 177C Apparatus Blank, 7-77 Cable Dangler, 3-20 Canadian Standards Association, 10-35 Centralized Survivable OS Access (OSGNE), 8-14 ABN LED, 6-10 Channel State Provisioning, 8-13 Access Circuit Breakers...
  • Page 842 Documentation Support, lxvii Fire Resistance, 10-35 Documents Fuses, 4-2 Ordering Documents, lxviii Shelf, 10-35 Drawings DDM-2000 OC-12, lvi DDM-2000 OC-3, lvi DS1 Outputs, 7-21 DS1 Timing Output, 7-18 DS3 Performance Monitoring, 9-29 C-Bit, 9-29 Gateway Network Elements (GNEs) F&M-Bit, 9-29...
  • Page 843 Index DS3, 9-26 EC-1, 9-26 Optical, 9-26 Lucent 2000 Product Family, 1-1 Holdoff Delay, 6-13 Holdover, 5-11, 7-20 Maintenance Automatic Diagnostics, 9-16 Proactive, 9-27 Identifiers Protection Switching, 9-17 AGNE, 8-43 Signaling, 9-10 CO/RT, 8-43 Single-Ended Maintenance Philosophy, 9-4 DSNE, 8-43 Subnetwork, 9-4 Network Element ID, 8-43 Three-tiered Operations, 9-1...
  • Page 844 Index Reports, 9-41 STS-1 Path Parameters, 9-36 TCA Summary Report, 9-41 TCA Transmission to OS, 9-41 Personal Computer for Software Download OC-12 Rings Specifications, 10-27 Ring Network Cross-Connection Example, 8-21 PMN LED, 4-4 OC-12 STS-1 Path Switched Ring, 5-2 Port State Provisioning, 8-13 Office Alarms, 6-13 Power Office Alarms Interfaces, 10-30...
  • Page 845 OC-12 Circuit Pack Keying, 3-5 OC-12 Dual Homing, 3-15 Related Training, lix OC-12 Front Access, 3-2 Releases OC-12 Front Panel, 3-6 DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer, 1-3, 1-8 OC-12 Multiplexer, 3-1 Reliability, 10-38 OC-12 Optical Extension, 3-13 Reliability Predictions, 10-40 OC-12 Rear Access, 3-2...
  • Page 846 Index Engineering and Installation Services, lxvi TIDs, 9-43 Ordering Documents, lxviii Timing Modes Technical, lxii DS1 Reference Cascading (MULT Mode), 5-11 Training, lix DS1 Synchronization Output, 5-11 Transmission Systems Technical Support Services, lxvii External, 5-10 Switch Selectable Parameters, 8-38 External Timing, 7-18 Switch Settings Free-Running, 5-10, 7-18 21G/21G-U OLIU Circuit Pack, 7-61...
  • Page 847 DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer TARP Release User/Service Manual (TOP) Volume 363-206-295 Issue December 1997...
  • Page 848 Copyright © 1997 Lucent Technologies Rights Reserved Printed U.S.A. Copyright Notice This material protected copyright laws United States other countries. reproduced, distributed altered fashion entity, including other Lucent Technologies Business Units Divisions, without expressed written consent. permission reproduce distribute, contact your local Lucent...
  • Page 849 Trademarks ANSI registered trademark American National Standards Institute. COMMON LANGUAGE registered trademark CLEI, CLLI, CLCI CLFI trademarks Bell Communications Research, Inc. DANTEL registered trademark Dantel, Inc. trademark Digital Equipment Corporation. Fujitsu registered trademark Fujitsu Limited. FIND-R-SCOPE registered trademark Industries, Inc. Hayes registered trademark...
  • Page 850 Doing? Document Title: DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer TARP Release User/Service Manual (TOP) Volume Document No.: 363-206-295 Issue Date: December 1997 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback this document. Your comments great value helping improve documentation. Please rate effectiveness this document following areas: Excellent Good Fair...
  • Page 851 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Do Cut—Fold Here Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, N.C. POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE DOCUMENTATION SERVICES 2400 Reynolda Road Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029...
  • Page 852 Doing? Document Title: DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer TARP Release User/Service Manual (TOP) Volume Document No.: 363-206-295 Issue Date: December 1997 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback this document. Your comments great value helping improve documentation. Please rate effectiveness this document following areas: Excellent Good Fair...
  • Page 853 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Do Cut—Fold Here Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, N.C. POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE DOCUMENTATION SERVICES 2400 Reynolda Road Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029...
  • Page 854 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Contents Overview Section Organization This Section Screen Display Panel Stamping Fonts DDM-2000 OC-12 Installation Safety Instructions Product Safety Labels Lightwave Safety Guidelines General Laser Information Lasers Damage Classification Lasers Lightwave Safety Precautions Safety Precautions Enclosed Systems Safety Precautions Unenclosed Systems...
  • Page 855 Contents Acceptance (Yellow) Acceptance Task Index System Turnup/Circuit Order (Orange) Task Index System/Circuit Order Operation (Green) Task Index Operation Trouble Clearing (Red) Task Index Trouble Clearing Detailed Level Procedures (Blue) Issue December 1997...

  • Page 856: Overview

    Operation Maintenance (TOP) Overview This section supports operation maintenance DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. includes following five separate tabs: Acceptance — Yellow System Turnup/Circuit Order — Orange Operation — Green Trouble Clearing — Detailed Level Procedures — Blue tab. Section Organization The Acceptance covers procedures check...

  • Page 857: How To Use This Top Section

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) OC-12 shelf span existing ring configuration. Upgrade software release. Upgrade OC-12 point-to-point system path switched ring. Upgrade OC-3 path switched ring system OC-12 path switched ring system. Establish OC-3/IS-3 dual ring interworking (DRI) OC-12 OC-3 FT-2000 OC-48.
  • Page 858 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Trouble Analysis Procedure director level procedure that contains step-by-step trouble-clearing instructions locate and/or troubles. Detailed Level Procedures detailed step-by-step instructions. Isolation Diagrams Diagrams instructions that helpful understanding procedures. procedures each section this numerical order, regardless type procedure (see Table...

  • Page 859: Screen Display And Panel Stamping Fonts

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) procedure refers software releases TARP Release later, refers ring software TARP releases with numerical value higher. need assistance clearing trouble after completing applicable trouble-clearing procedures this section, contact your local regional maintenance assistance group. telephone number Lucent Technologies Regional...

  • Page 860: Safety Instructions

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Safety Instructions Product Safety Labels These instructions involve lasers, lightwave optical cable connectors, precautions when handling circuit packs prevent damage from electrostatic discharge. appropriate user/service manual contains admonishments form DANGERS, WARNINGS, and CAUTIONS that must followed times.

  • Page 861: Lasers And Eye Damage

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Conventional lasers produce intense beam monochromatic light. term monochromaticity means single wavelength output pure color that visible invisible eye. conventional laser produces small-size beam light, because beam size small power density (also called irradiance) very high. Consequently, lasers laser...

  • Page 862: Lightwave Safety Precautions

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Lightwave Safety Precautions normal operating mode, lightwave system totally enclosed presents risk injury. Class system under FDA/CDRH scheme. lightguide cables that interconnect various components lightwave system disconnect break, expose people lightwave emission. Also, certain measures maintenance procedures expose technician...
  • Page 863 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) - NOTICE - UNTERMINATED OPTICAL CONNECTORS MAY EMIT LASER RADIATION. DO NOT VIEW BEAM WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. - DANGER - INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. - NOTICE - TO REMOVE COVER; UNTERMINATED OPTICAL CONNECTORS MAY EMIT LASER 1.

  • Page 864: Safety Precautions For Unenclosed Systems

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Safety Precautions Unenclosed Systems During service, maintenance, restoration, lightwave transmission system considered unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow these practices: Only authorized, trained personnel shall premitted service, maintenance, restoration. Avoid exposing emissions from unterminated, energized optical connectors close distances.

  • Page 865: Electrostatic Discharge (Esd) Considerations

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Considerations CAUTION: Industry experience shown that integrated circuit packs damaged static electricity that builds work surfaces personnel. static charges produced various charging effects movement contact with other objects. allows greater static charges accumulate. Higher potentials measured...
  • Page 866 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) reduce possibility damage, shelves equipped with grounding jacks enable personnel ground themselves using wrist straps (Figure while handling circuit packs working shelf(s). jacks connection wrist straps located lower right-hand corner each shelf labeled. When grounding jacks provided, alligator clip...
  • Page 867 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. Issue December 1997...

  • Page 868: General Safety Instructions

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) General Safety Instructions GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read understand instructions. Follow warnings instructions marked product. place this product unstable cart, stand, table. product fall, causing serious damage product. Slots openings this product’s back bottom provided ventilation. protect from overheating, these...

  • Page 869: Installation Safety Instructions

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Installation Safety Instructions INSTALLATION SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read understand instructions. Installation maintenance procedures must followed performed trained personnel only. interfaces should leave building premises unless connected telecommunication devices providing primary secondary protection, applicable. information proper mounting instructions, consult 363-206-204, DDM-2000...

  • Page 870: Master Task Index

    IXL- 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance: Issue December 1997 Page Master Task Index FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Indication Clear Trouble Clearing: TAP-109 Accept DDM-2000 OC-12 (Looped Back) — Optical Operation Acceptance: NTP-003 Accept DDM-2000 OC-12 System (Network) Acceptance: NTP-004 Accept DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer (Equipped)
  • Page 871 IXL- Operation Maintenance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Alarm ACTY Only Clear Trouble Clearing: TAP-117 Alarm Power Minor (PMN) Clear Trouble Clearing: TAP-104 Brownout Condition — Flashing Display Trouble Clearing: TAP-111 Change Timing Mode TGS/TG3 Circuit Pack Detailed...
  • Page 872 IXL- 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance: Issue December 1997 Page FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Discontinue EC-1 Interface — Path Switched Ring Circuit Order: NTP-025 Discontinue OC-3/IS-3 Span Circuit Order: NTP-009 Discontinue OC-3c/IS-3c (STS-3c) Service Circuit Order: NTP-010 Diskettes (Floppy Disks) — Copy Make Backups...
  • Page 873 IXL- Operation Maintenance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Equip DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer (Looped Back) System Turnup: NTP-002 Establish Single-Homed OC-3/IS-3 Access — DDM-2000 OC-12 Backbone Ring System Turnup: NTP-003 Establish Single-Homed OC-12 Access — FT-2000 OC-48 Backbone Ring...
  • Page 874 IXL- 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance: Issue December 1997 Page FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Establish OC-3/IS-3 Dual Ring Interworking — DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 FT-2000 Ring Configurations OC-3 Optical Fiber Spans System Turnup: NTP-011 Establish EC-1 Dual Ring Interworking — DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 FT-2000 Ring...
  • Page 875 IXL- Operation Maintenance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Generic Software Version Identification — Retrieve Detailed Level Procedure: DLP-526 Install/Replace Lightguide Buildout Detailed Level Procedure: DLP-538 Install SYSCTL — Shelf Detailed Level Procedure: DLP-557 Replace SYSCTL —...
  • Page 876 IXL- 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance: Issue December 1997 Page FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Minor (MN) Alarm DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Clear Trouble Clearing: TAP-112 ACTY Alarm Only Clear Trouble Clearing: TAP-117 OC-3/IS-3 Optical Span — Discontinue Circuit Order: NTP-009 OC-3c/IS-3c (STS-3c) Service —...
  • Page 877 IXL- Operation Maintenance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Service — Discontinue OC-3c/IS-3c (STS-3c) Cicruit Order: NTP-010 Shelf (Node) — — Path Switched Ring Circuit Order: NTP-021 Shelf — Equip DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer (Looped Back) System Turnup: NTP-002 Span...
  • Page 878 IXL- 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance: Issue December 1997 Page FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Test LEDs Detailed Level Procedure: DLP-507 Test (Accept) DDM-2000 (Looped Back) Optical Operation Acceptance: NTP-003 Test (Accept) End-to-End System OC-12 Point Point Acceptance: NTP-004 Test (Accept) DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer (Equipped)
  • Page 879 IXL- Operation Maintenance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Upgrade DDM-2000 OC-12 Point-to-Point Path Switched Ring Service Circuit Order: NTP-032 Upgrade Timing Detailed Level Procedure: DLP-542 Upgrade TBOS/Parallel Telemetry TL1/X.25 Detailed Level Procedure: DLP-533 Issue December 1997...

  • Page 880: Numerical List Of Top Procedures

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Numerical List Procedures Table Numerical List Procedures (Note) Acceptance IXL-001 Acceptance Task Index NTP-002 Overview Acceptance (Test) Procedures DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer (Equipped) NTP-003 Accept (Test) DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Shelf (Looped-Back) NTP-004 Test (Accept) End-to-End OC-12 System (Network) System Turnup/Circuit...
  • Page 881 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Table Numerical List Procedures (Contd) (Note) System Turnup/Circuit Order NTP-016 Upgrade DDM-2000 OC-12 Release TARP Release System Service NTP-017 Establish Initial End-to-End Service Path Switched Ring Group Equipped Service NTP-018 Group Service System Service NTP-019 Discontinue End-to-End Service NTP-020...
  • Page 882 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Table Numerical List Procedures (Contd) (Note) System Turnup/Circuit Order NTP-033 Unused NTP-034 Upgrade DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring Network OC-12 Ring Network Service Operations IXL-001 Task Index NTP-002 CPro-2000 System Backup Restore Trouble Clearing IXL-001 Task Index TAD-100 Maintenance Philosophy TAP-101...
  • Page 883 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Table Numerical List Procedures (Contd) (Note) Detailed Level Procedures (DLP) DLP-500 Install BCP4 OHCTL Circuit Pack Shelf DLP-501 Replace BBG8/BBG8B/BBG5 SYSCTL Circuit Pack Service DLP-502 Install TGS/TG3 Circuit Packs DLP-503 Install FUNCTION UNITS OLIU Circuit Packs DLP-504 Connect Optical...
  • Page 884 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Table Numerical List Procedures (Contd) (Note) Detailed Level Procedures (DLP) DLP-530 Install Software Generic Program In-Service System Remote Shelf Download DLP-531 Perform Test Batteries Using 197A BATTERY LOAD TEST DLP-532 Check 197A BATTERY LOAD TEST DLP-533 Upgrade TBOS/Parallel Telemetry...
  • Page 885 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) Table Numerical List Procedures (Contd) (Note) Detailed Level Procedures (DLP) DLP-556 Make Cross-Connections Using Single/Dual Homing OC-12 Extensions OC-12/OC-48 Configurations DLP-557 Install BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL Shelf Only BCP4 OHCTL Installed DLP-558 Provision STS-1 Path Trace DLP-559 Obtain Equipment, Check Software,...

  • Page 886: Cpro-2000 Graphical User Interface

    363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) CPro-2000 Graphical User Interface Provisioning Tool ‡ CPro-2000 Graphical User Interface Provisioning Tool Microsoft § based user interface that optionally used with DDM-2000 Windows OC-12 Multiplexer. tool simplifies mechanizes administration, maintenance, provisioning operations ring networks. With tool user can:...
  • Page 887 363-206-295 Operation Maintenance (TOP) operates enchanced graphical tool general configuration management aid. provides port, cross-connection, path provisioning, well flowthrough from provisioning operations systems (OSs) NEs. also provides fault management through subnetwork alarm event preprocessing prior sending fault information network surveillance system such Network...
  • Page 888 IXL- 363-206-295 Acceptance: Issue December 1997 Page Acceptance Task Index FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Acceptance Procedures (Shelf Equipped) NOTE: following procedures testing DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer system after another organization equipped procedures test DDM-2000 OC-12 system after circuit packs have been installed shelves...
  • Page 889 NTP- 363-206-295 Acceptance: Issue December 1997 Page Overview Acceptance (Test) Procedures DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer (Equipped) ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors emit invisible laser radiation. damage occur beam viewed directly with improper optical instruments. Avoid direct exposure beam.
  • Page 890 NTP- Acceptance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, (check) circuit pack option switch settings, required. DLP-510 Test (accept) DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer (looped back). Acceptance: NTP-003 Test (accept) end-to-end DDM-2000 OC-12 System Acceptance: NTP-004 required, perform transmission tests each port.
  • Page 891 NTP- 363-206-295 Acceptance: Issue December 1997 Page Accept (Test) DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer Shelf (Looped-Back) ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors emit invisible laser radiation. damage occur beam viewed directly with improper optical instruments. Avoid direct exposure beam. CAUTION: DDM-2000 OC-12...
  • Page 892 NTP- Acceptance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE commands rtrv-ne, rtrv-oc3, rtrv-sync or rtrv-( used retrieve switch settings except rtrv-t3 settings 3DS3 and 3STS1E circuit packs. Verify circuit pack option switches have been DLP-510 correctly, already performed.
  • Page 893 NTP- 363-206-295 Acceptance: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE button depressed longer than seconds, SYSCTL display will scroll through software version code LEDs will remain lighted until code displayed. NOTE BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL BCP4 OHCTL installed, proper release software must...
  • Page 894 NTP- Acceptance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE During installation and/or initial testing, provisionable parameters have been which need reset their default values. STS-1 and/or STS-3c cross-connections have been made which should deleted before system placed service.
  • Page 895 NTP- 363-206-295 Acceptance: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Test ED-8C733-30, shelf. DLP-536 NOTE: craft interface terminal (CIT) required access optional features DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer. Refer "Commands Reports" section commands rtrv-( determine existing options. Activate optional features that require this...
  • Page 896 NTP- 363-206-295 Acceptance: Issue December 1997 Page Test (Accept) End-to-End DDM-2000 OC-12 System (Network) ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors emit invisible laser radiation. damage occur beam viewed directly with improper optical instruments. Avoid direct exposure beam. CAUTION DDM-2000 circuit...
  • Page 897 NTP- Acceptance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE DDM-2000 fails respond indicated manner, refer trouble organization that installed DDM-2000 Trouble Clearing: IXL-001 NOTE During installation and/or initial testing, provisionable parameters have been which need reset default values.
  • Page 898 NTP- 363-206-295 Acceptance: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE external timing mode specified timing reference available shelf turnup, TGS/TG3 option switches correctly. specified timing mode must TGS/TG3 circuit packs. NOTE option switch setting changed, update must done momentarily depressing...
  • Page 899 NTP- Acceptance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Determine optical loss optical facility from office records making required measurements. NOTE: There option switches 23G/23G-U, 23H/23H-U, 21G2-U or 21D/21D-U OLIU 21G/21G-U OLIU installed, ensure HIGH/LOW DLP-510 POWER option switches agree...
  • Page 900 NTP- 363-206-295 Acceptance: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE Kbyte/Sbyte (sync messaging) enabled node system, must enabled nodes system. NOTE The rtrv-oc12: and rtrv-oc3: commands retrieve OC-12 Line Provisioning Report This report displays OC-3 Line Provisioning Report provisioned configuration...
  • Page 901 NTP- Acceptance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE Sync Autoreconfiguration enabled, Kbyte/Sbyte must also enabled. NOTE Sync Autoreconfiguration enabled node system, must enabled nodes system. NOTE command retrieves rtrv-sync: Synchronization This report displays provisioning operational Report information synchronization...
  • Page 902 NTP- 363-206-295 Acceptance: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE section data communication channel (DCC), used communications, must enabled each network element (shelf) end-to-end line test work. Default condition channel "enabled". been disabled, set-fecom: command each shelf enable communications.
  • Page 903 NTP- Acceptance 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Check local office alarm interface required. DLP-512 Test protection switching function, required. DLP-515 system ready service established. Activate remaining optional features required. DLP-509...
  • Page 904 IXL- 363-206-295 System Turnup/Circuit Order: Issue December 1997 Page System Turnup/Circuit Order Task Index FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Equipment Required Shelf Turnup MS-DOS† IBM* compatible personal computer with Release later. Used loading software. Proper software release system configuration have. 3.
  • Page 905 IXL- System Turnup/Circuit Order 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Establish End-to-End DDM-2000 OC-12 System — OC-12 Optical Fiber Spans Path Switched Ring Network System Turnup: NTP-020 Establish Dual-Homed OC-3/IS-3 Access — DDM-2000 OC-12 Backbone Ring System Turnup: NTP-004...
  • Page 906 IXL- 363-206-295 System Turnup/Circuit Order: Issue December 1997 Page FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Establish Video Broadcast Access — DDM-2000 OC-12 Backbone Ring System Turnup: NTP-005 Service — Establish Initial Establish Initial End-to-End Service — Path Switched Ring Group Equipped Service System Turnup:...
  • Page 907 IXL- System Turnup/Circuit Order 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Conversions Change Kbyte Sync Messaging Sbyte Sync Messaging Detailed Level Procedures: DLP-560 Convert Group Service EC-1 Group Service — Path Switched Ring Circuit Order: NTP-026 Service —...
  • Page 908 IXL- 363-206-295 System Turnup/Circuit Order: Issue December 1997 Page FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Upgrades Upgrade DDM-2000 OC-12 Release TARP Release System Service Circuit Order: NTP-016 Upgrade DDM-2000 OC-12/FT-2000 Dual Ring Interworking Network From EC-1 OC-3/IS-3 Service Circuit Order: NTP-012 Upgrade DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12...
  • Page 909 IXL- System Turnup/Circuit Order 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 FIND YOUR LIST BELOW THEN Upgrade TBOS/Parallel Telemetry TL1/X.25 DLP-533 Upgrade Timing DLP-542...
  • Page 910 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Examples System Configurations Turnup Procedures following figures reference only intended suggest working configuration. They used support this IXL-001. figures this section show variety subnetwork configurations associated flow diagrams. Figure depicts large network configuration consisting FT-2000 OC-48, DDM-2000...
  • Page 911 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 912 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — Single Homed OC-3 Access FT-2000 Backbone Ring...
  • Page 913 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 914 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — Single Homed FiberReach Access DDM-2000 OC-3 Backbone Ring...
  • Page 915 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 916 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — DDM-2000 OC-3 Path Switched Ring...
  • Page 917 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 918 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — OC-3 Optical Span Linear Extension Between FT-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 919 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 920 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — OC-3 Shelf and/or Optical Span Added Extension DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring...
  • Page 921 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 922 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — Dual Homed FiberReach Access DDM-2000 OC-3 Backbone Ring...
  • Page 923 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 924 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — DDM-2000 OC-12 Path Switched Ring...
  • Page 925 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 926 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — OC-3 Optical Span Extension Between DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 927 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 928 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — OC-3/IS-3 Optical Span Extension Between DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring FT-2000 OC-48...
  • Page 929 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 930 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — OC-3/IS-3 Dual Ring Interworking Between DDM-2000 OC-3 Ring FT-2000 OC-48...
  • Page 931 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 932 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — Single-Homed OC-12 Access FT-2000 OC-48 Backbone Ring...
  • Page 933 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 934 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — Single-Homed OC-3 Access DDM-2000 OC-12 Backbone Ring...
  • Page 935 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 936 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — Dual-Homed OC-3 Access FT-2000 OC-48 Backbone Ring...
  • Page 937 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 938 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — Dual-Homed OC-12 Access FT-2000 OC-48 Backbone Ring...
  • Page 939 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 940 IXL- 363-206-295 Issue December 1997 Page Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large Network Configurations — Dual-Homed OC-3 Access DDM-2000 OC-12 Backbone Ring...
  • Page 941 OC-3 Fiber OC-48 OC-48 OC-3 Fiber Reach Reach OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Fiber Reach OC-3 Fiber Reach DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 OC-3 Figure DDM-2000/FT-2000 Large...
  • Page 942 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page Equip DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer (Looped-Back) ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors emit invisible laser radiation. Avoid direct exposure beam. view beam with optical instruments. controls adjustments performance procedures other than those specified...
  • Page 943 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Install BCP4 OHCTL circuit pack. DLP-500 NOTE: system software been previously installed OHCTL and SYSCTL must installed DLP-527 after SYSCTL installed. Install BBG8/BBG8B SYSCTL circuit pack. DLP-557 NOTE additional circuit...
  • Page 944 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Install TGS/TG3 timing circuit packs. DLP-502 Install BCP3 circuit packs. DLP-505 Install 23G/23G-U or 23H/23H-U OLIU circuit packs. DLP-535 Install 177C apparatus blanks APPBLK MAIN-A-1 and MAIN-A-2(P) slots ensure adequate...

  • Page 945: Bbg11B 3Ds3 Circuit Pack

    NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE fecom enabled, alarm will inconsistent values occur when OLIU looped back. Normally, alarm occurs when "Network Side/User Side" parameters both ends same. clear alarm during fiber loopback, the set-fecom: address: com=disable command...
  • Page 946 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Install BBG12 3STS1E circuit packs required). DLP-547 Install 177B apparatus blanks APPBLK unused function unit slots ensure adequate cooling controlling flow through shelf. CAUTION: command affect service. should never init-sys:all...
  • Page 947 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Perform test. DLP-507 NOTE: This procedure assumes that DDM-2000 high speed signals looped back [manual optical (OLIU) loopback]. Automatic local tests (looped back), using command, available test-auto TARP Release Perform...
  • Page 948 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Perform DDM-2000 OC-12 receiver sensitivity test DLP-544 required). Optional test. Check office alarm interface required. DLP-512 Test protection switching function, required. DLP-515 CAUTION: command affect service. should never init-sys:all used...
  • Page 949 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE craft interface terminal (CIT) required access optional features DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer, such system name (tid), security logins, date time, communications (fecom), etc. NOTE Alarm activity will result when optical...
  • Page 950 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page Establish Single-Homed OC-3/IS-3 Access DDM-2000 OC-12 Backbone Ring ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors emit invisible laser radiation. Avoid direct exposure beam. view beam with optical instruments. controls adjustments performance procedures other...
  • Page 951 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Determine network configuration (for example, Figures Verify that host DDM-2000 OC-12 shelf equipped DLP-526 with TARP Release later ring software. equipped with TARP Release later software, upgrade DDM-2000 OC-12 host...
  • Page 952 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE 21G/21G-U OLIU circuit packs used, HIGH/LOW POWER switch must before connecting optical loops. NOTE fecom enabled, alarm will inconsistent values occur when OLIU looped back. Normally, alarm occurs when...
  • Page 953 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE line timing mode specified external timing mode specified timing reference available OC-3 shelf turnup, TGS/TG3 option switches probably free running Before this configuration established, specified timing mode must TGS/TG3...
  • Page 954 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE Kbyte/Sbyte (sync messaging) enabled OC-3 MAIN-1 and MAIN-2(P) optical interfaces node OC-3 ring, must be enabled nodes OC-3 ring FUNCTION UNITS slots host OC-12 shelf. NOTE command retrieves rtrv-oc3:...
  • Page 955 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE command retrieves rtrv-sync: Synchronization This report displays provisioning operational Report information synchronization attributes DDM-2000. "Commands Reports" section 363-206-295, DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer, TARP Release User/Service Manual—Volume 363-206-285, DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer,...
  • Page 956 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: This single-homed ring configuration requires that FN-( OLIU OC-12 shelf connect MAIN-1 OLIU first OC-3 shelf from OC-12 shelf. MAIN-2(P) OLIU OC-3 shelf (node) connects MAIN-1 OLIU adjacent OC-3...
  • Page 957 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: section data communication channel (DCC), used communications, must enabled each network element (shelf) optical interface being tested order end-to-end line tests work. Default condition channel "enabled". been disabled, set-fecom: command...
  • Page 958 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: Shelves that part subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that NSAP field level IS-IS routing AREA parameters command set. Section ent-ulsdcc-l3 "Commands Reports" 363-206-295, DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer, TARP...
  • Page 959 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: Establishing service requires that proper slots each terminating node properly equipped with correct circuit pack(s) type service being established. also requires numerous cross connections each nodes representing path required...
  • Page 960 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 linear 1+1 extension [NTP-008] DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 linear 1+1 DDM-2000 extension [NTP-008] DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-12 DDM-2000 DDM-2000...
  • Page 961 OLIU 21G-U 2(P) 2(P) 21G-U 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) OC12 OC12 OLIU OLIU DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring OC12 OC12 Node 5 Node 4 DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 MAIN B2(P) MAIN B2(P) MAIN B1 OC12 MAIN B1 23G/23G-U 23G/23G-U 23G/23G-U...
  • Page 962 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, DDM-2000 OC-12 DCC Network Side (NS)/User Side (US) Defaults (set-fecom:nsus=ns/us) FN-A-1 FN-A-2 FN-B-1 FN-B-2 FN-C-1 FN-C-2 FN-D-1 FN-D-2 21-Type OLIUs dcc-a1 dcc-a2 dcc-b1 dcc-b2 dcc-c1 dcc-c2 dcc-d1...
  • Page 963 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page Establish Dual-Homed OC-3/IS-3 Access DDM-2000 OC-12 Backbone Ring ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors emit invisible laser radiation. Avoid direct exposure beam. view beam with optical instruments. controls adjustments performance procedures other...
  • Page 964 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Determine network configuration (for example, Figures Verify host DDM-2000 OC-12 shelves (for example, DLP-526 Figures nodes equipped with TARP Release later ring software. equipped with TARP Release later software, upgrade...
  • Page 965 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE 21G/21G-U OLIU circuit packs used, HIGH/LOW POWER switch must before connecting optical loops. NOTE fecom enabled, alarm will inconsistent values occur when OLIU looped back. Normally, alarm occurs when...
  • Page 966 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE line timing mode specified external timing mode specified timing reference available OC-3 shelf turnup, TGS/TG3 option switches probably free running Before this configuration established, specified timing mode must TGS/TG3...
  • Page 967 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE Kbyte/Sbyte (sync messaging) enabled OC-3 MAIN-1 and MAIN-2(P) optical interfaces node OC-3 ring, must be enabled nodes OC-3 ring FUNCTION UNITS slots host OC-12 shelf. NOTE command retrieves rtrv-oc3:...
  • Page 968 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE The rtrv-sync: command retrieves Synchronization This report displays provisioning operational Report information synchronization attributes DDM-2000. "Commands Reports" section 363-206-295, DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer, TARP Release User/Service Manual—Volume 363-206-285, DDM-2000 OC-3...
  • Page 969 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE dual homing configurations, OLIU circuit packs must installed correct FUNCTION UNITS slots host OC-12 nodes support direction traffic required. example, Figures Figure 21G-U/21G2-U/21D-U OLIU installed Node FUNCTION UNITS group A slot...
  • Page 970 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE Unused optical connectors OLIU should remain looped until optical line connections made. near OC-12 host node, remove optical loop from FUNCTION UNITS OC-3 OLIU being used OC-3 ring configuration...
  • Page 971 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: Shelves that part subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that NSAP field level IS-IS routing AREA parameters command set. Section ent-ulsdcc-l3 "Commands Reports" 363-206-295, DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer, TARP...
  • Page 972 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: Establishing service requires that proper slots each terminating node properly equipped with correct circuit pack(s) type service being established. also requires numerous cross connections each nodes representing path required...
  • Page 973 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, OC-3 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 linear 1+1 extension [NTP-008] DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 linear 1+1 DDM-2000 extension [NTP-008] DDM-2000 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 OC-3 OC-12 DDM-2000 DDM-2000...
  • Page 974 OLIU 21G-U 2(P) 2(P) 21G-U 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) OC12 OC12 OLIU OLIU DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring OC12 OC12 Node 5 Node 4 DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 MAIN B2(P) MAIN B2(P) MAIN B1 OC12 MAIN B1 23G/23G-U 23G/23G-U 23G/23G-U...
  • Page 975 21G-U 2(P) 2(P) 21G-U 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) OC12 OC12 OLIU OLIU DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring OC12 OC12 Node 5 Node 8 Node 4 DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 MAIN B2(P) MAIN B2(P) OC12 MAIN B2(P) MAIN B1...
  • Page 976 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, DDM-2000 OC-12 DCC Network Side (NS)/User Side (US) Defaults (set-fecom:nsus=ns/us) FN-A-1 FN-A-2 FN-B-1 FN-B-2 FN-C-1 FN-C-2 FN-D-1 FN-D-2 21-Type OLIUs dcc-a1 dcc-a2 dcc-b1 dcc-b2 dcc-c1 dcc-c2 dcc-d1...
  • Page 977 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, DDM-2000 OC-12 DCC Network Side (NS)/User Side (US) Defaults (set-fecom:nsus=ns/us) FN-A-1 FN-A-2 FN-B-1 FN-B-2 FN-C-1 FN-C-2 FN-D-1 FN-D-2 21-Type OLIUs dcc-a1 dcc-a2 dcc-b1 dcc-b2 dcc-c1 dcc-c2 dcc-d1...
  • Page 978 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page Establish Video Broadcast Access DDM-2000 OC-12 Backbone Ring ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, CAUTION: DDM-2000 OC-12 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which damaged electrostatic discharge. static ground wrist strap must worn when handling circuit...
  • Page 979 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: The rtrv-eqpt: command retrieves Equipage Version This report lists circuit pack type version information Report more slots. "Commands Reports" section this manual description command format. rtrv-eqpt: Verify/install 21G/21G-U/21G2-U/21D/21D-U OLIU...
  • Page 980 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: STS-3c feature allows STS-3c service (concatenated signals) supported must licensed use. command each OC-12 shelf set-feat: network enable OC-12 shelf each STS-3c service licensed use. (set-feat:feat= sts3c ,act= enabled ) Verify that LEDs...
  • Page 981 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE TARP Release later software supports manual STS-1/STS-3c cross-connections OC-12 ring applications. Manual STS-3c cross-connections have made each shelf configure transmission path video circuit being established. Cross- connections made (source...
  • Page 982 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Perform STS-3c end-to-end transmission test each DLP-543 circuit being into service (optional). command determine rtrv-state-sts3c: channel state STS-3c channel being established. NOTE: port nmon ( n state, signal monitored alarmed.
  • Page 983 21G-U 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) OLIU OLIU OC-3c (STS-3c) OC12 OC12 Termination DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring Node 4 Node 3 DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 MAIN B2(P) MAIN B2(P) MAIN B1 OC12 MAIN B1 23G/23G-U 23G/23G-U 23G/23G-U 23G/23G-U OLIU...
  • Page 984 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page Establish STS-3c Transport Access DDM-2000 OC-12 Backbone Ring ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, CAUTION: DDM-2000 OC-12 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which damaged electrostatic discharge. static ground wrist strap must worn when handling circuit...
  • Page 985 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: The rtrv-eqpt: command retrieves Equipage Version This report lists circuit pack type version information Report more slots. "Commands Reports" section this manual description command format. rtrv-eqpt: Verify/install 21G/21G-U/21G2-U/21D/21D-U OLIU...
  • Page 986 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: STS-3c feature allows STS-3c service (concatenated signals) supported must licensed use. command each OC-12 shelf set-feat: network enable OC-12 shelf STS-3c service licensed use. (set-feat:feat= sts3c ,act= enabled ) Verify that LEDs...
  • Page 987 NTP- System Turnup 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE TARP Release later software supports manual STS-1/STS-3c cross-connections OC-12 ring applications. Manual STS-3c cross-connections have made each shelf configure transmission path STS-3c circuit being established. Cross- connections made each...
  • Page 988 NTP- 363-206-295 System Turnup: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Perform STS-3c end-to-end transmission test each DLP-543 circuit being into service (optional). command determine rtrv-state-sts3c: channel state STS-3c channel being established. NOTE: port nmon ( n state, signal monitored alarmed.
  • Page 989 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) 2(P) OLIU OLIU (1+1) OC-3c (STS-3c) OC12 OC12 Termination DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring Node 4 Node 3 DDM-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-12 MAIN B2(P) MAIN B2(P) MAIN B1 OC12 MAIN B1 23G/23G-U 23G/23G-U 23G/23G-U 23G/23G-U OLIU...
  • Page 990 NTP- 363-206-295 Circuit Order: Issue December 1997 Page Establish OC-3/IS-3 Optical Span Extension Between FT-2000 DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, CAUTION: DDM-2000 circuit packs contain static sensitive components which damaged electrostatic discharge. static ground wrist strap must worn when handling...
  • Page 991 NTP- Circuit Order 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Notify maintenance center that alarms will generated. WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors emit invisible laser radiation. damage occur beam viewed directly with improper optical instruments. Avoid direct exposure beam.
  • Page 992 NTP- 363-206-295 Circuit Order: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE 21G/21G-U OLIU circuit packs used, HIGH/LOW POWER switch must before connecting optical loops. NOTE fecom enabled, alarm will inconsistent values occur when OLIU looped back. Normally, alarm occurs when...
  • Page 993 NTP- Circuit Order 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Determine optical loss optical facility from office records making required measurements. NOTE: Network Side/User Side parameters OC-3 set-fecom: command FT-2000 orientation must opposite each OC-3/IS-3 optical spans. example, Figure command...
  • Page 994 NTP- 363-206-295 Circuit Order: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, procedures FT-2000 User/Service Manual Verify/"Add OC-3 Speed Slots" host FT-2000 shelf. (365-575-103, FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System, Releases 8.1, User/Service Manual 3/IS-3 Speed Slot(s), NTP-010 (Verify/Provision FT-2000 speed OC-3/IS-3 slots Protection...
  • Page 995 NTP- Circuit Order 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, NOTE: DDM-2000 shelves that part subnetwork being partitioned into multiple areas require that NSAP field level IS-IS AREA routing parameters command set. ent-ulsdcc-l3 Section "Commands Reports" 363-206-295, DDM-2000 Multiplexer, TARP...
  • Page 996 NTP- 363-206-295 Circuit Order: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Verify duplicate settings exist. rtrv-map- command used shelf network network display settings. duplicates exist, determine settings command make set-ne settings. Perform automatic end-to-end OC-3 line test DLP-552 OC-3/IS-3 optical extension.
  • Page 997 NTP- Circuit Order 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, OC-12 DDM-2000 DDM-2000 linear 1+1 extension [NTP-007] DDM-2000 DDM-2000 OC-3 DDM-2000 OC-12 FT-2000 OC-12 DDM-2000 OC-48 FT-2000 DDM-2000 FT-2000 OC-12 FT-2000 OC-48 DDM-2000 Single homing configuration [NTP-015] FT-2000 OC-12 Dual homing...
  • Page 998 NTP- 363-206-295 Circuit Order: Issue December 1997 Page ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, DDM-2000 OC-12 DCC Network Side (NS)/User Side (US) Defaults (set-fecom:nsus=ns/us) FN-A FN-B FN-C FN-D 21-Type OLIUs dcc-a dcc-b dcc-c dcc-d (1+1) OC12 OC12 DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring Node 5...
  • Page 999 NTP- 363-206-295 Circuit Order: Issue December 1997 Page Establish OC-3/IS-3 Optical Span Extension Between DDM-2000 OC-12 Ring DDM-2000 OC-3 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors emit invisible laser radiation. Avoid direct exposure beam. view beam with optical instruments.
  • Page 1000 NTP- Circuit Order 363-206-295 Page Issue December 1997 ITEMS BELOW ORDER LISTED DETAILS, Notify maintenance center that alarms will generated. NOTE: The rtrv-eqpt: command retrieves Equipage Version This report lists circuit pack type version information Report more slots. "Commands Reports" section this manual...

Table of Contents